JP7693473B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allow players to play games.

Conventionally, gaming machines have been proposed that execute a reach effect again during a jackpot.

JP2005-334092

Since the reach effect involves effects such as the falling of reels, when the reach effect is executed again during a jackpot effect, effects that impair the visibility of the LCD screen, such as the falling of reels, are executed, and there is a risk that the player will become dissatisfied.

The present invention has been made in consideration of the above-mentioned circumstances, and has as its object to prevent player dissatisfaction and increase player interest.

(1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means for executing a performance;
A display means;
A sound output means;
A movable body,
the movable body is movable from a first position to a second position that is a position covering the display means more than the first position,
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined image can be displayed on the display means as an image of a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When a specific scene of the predetermined image is displayed , the movable body is capable of being moved from the first position to the second position,
A specific image can be displayed after the suggestion performance is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and the game starts to be controlled to the advantageous state,
the specific video includes a first specific video including at least the specific scene, a second specific video suggesting that the first specific video will be displayed, and a third specific video corresponding to a piece of music output from the sound output means;
The performance control means includes:
When the specific scene is displayed in the first specific image, the movable body is not moved from the first position to the second position;
When the suggestion performance is being performed, a special performance can be performed;
As the predetermined image, a special effect image related to the special effect and a game information display related to the progress of the game can be displayed on the display means;
In the first specific image, the special effect image and the game information display are not displayed,
In the suggestion performance, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special performance is executed than when the special performance is not executed.
It is characterized by:

According to this configuration, in the first operation-related performance, which is less likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the second operation-related performance, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at one angle, while in the second operation-related performance, which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first operation-related performance, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at multiple angles, making the second operation-related performance feel more special than the first operation-related performance, and increasing interest in the suggestive performance in which the operation-related performance is executed. Furthermore, by using the highest proportion of similar colors of the specific color among the multiple colors that include at least similar colors of the specific color that suggest that the performance is controlled to an advantageous state as the background image when the second operation-related performance is executed, the second operation-related performance can feel more special than the first operation-related performance, and the player can easily recognize that the performance is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state, allowing the player to predict advantageous developments after the operation-related performance.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of the pachinko game machine 1 at characteristic portion 152F. FIG. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. An explanatory diagram showing a hit determination table and a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. 13 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the small hit end processing. An explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type table in feature section 03TM. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table, and (3), (4), and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a display control unit. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a drawing method for three-dimensional image processing. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a viewpoint and an object in a virtual three-dimensional space. This is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after the development of the SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation corresponding to the first half of the SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation corresponding to the first part of the second half of an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation corresponding to the second half of the SP Reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a normal button effect executed in the second part of the latter half of an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a normal button effect executed in the second part of the latter half of an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation corresponding to the second half, third part of an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing specific examples of the first chance up effect and the second chance up effect executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a third chance up effect executed in the second part of the latter half of an SP reach. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the fourth chance up effect executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance determination process at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the effect at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment. A flowchart showing an example of a process for determining the performance during a jackpot. An explanatory diagram showing a table for determining whether or not to execute consecutive image hold effects. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 3R jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10R jackpot occurs. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode when a 10R jackpot occurs. FIG. 11 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 2A is an explanatory diagram showing the configuration of an attacker lamp, and FIG. 2B is an explanatory diagram showing the light emission mode of the attacker lamp. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to the attacker lamp lighting presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to the attacker lamp lighting presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to the attacker lamp lighting presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect relating to the attacker lamp lighting presentation. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation pattern related to the attacker lamp hold consecutive presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation aspect related to an over winning presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to the attacker lamp V winning announcement presentation. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to attacker lamp control when power is cut off. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to attacker lamp control when a chance-up presentation is executed. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode relating to attacker lamp control when a chance-up presentation is executed. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance determination process at the start of fluctuation in the third embodiment. An explanatory diagram showing a table referenced in the process of determining the effect at the start of fluctuation in the third embodiment. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect related to the first button effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to the first button presentation. 13 is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect related to the second button effect. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to the second button presentation. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing wavelengths of display colors.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various presentation images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special game is started by the second special pattern display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In this embodiment, the time-saving state is controlled based on the display result of the special symbol changing display being a "jackpot". However, the invention is not limited to this form, and the time-saving state may be controlled based on a trigger other than the display result of the special symbol changing display being a "jackpot".

For example, a "miss with time-saving" may be provided as a display result of the special pattern change display. When a miss with time-saving is displayed, the time-saving control is controlled to time-saving state B (e.g., chance time with 7 time-saving times) in which the time-saving control is performed a first predetermined number of times. Also, when 500 changes are performed in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot, the time-saving control is controlled to time-saving state C (e.g., play time with 99 time-saving times) in which the time-saving control is performed a second predetermined number of times. However, even if 500 changes are performed again in a low probability state without being controlled to a jackpot after the end of time-saving state C, the time-saving control will not be performed again based on this.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the Presentation, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various presentations (presentations to inform the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The presentations are described below. The presentations are executed by displaying various presentation images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the presentations may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed, which have different rates of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also called the jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation rate) depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc., as shown in Fig. 2. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc., are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(operation)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes the addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the game control timer interrupt process described below is executed to resume the change of the special symbols from the state before the recovery.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

After executing such game control main processing, the CPU 103 receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, and then executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch processing to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, by executing a predetermined information output processing, data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the big win game state and the small win game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. Then, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). In addition, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed in the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process is ended.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 152F)
Next, the characteristic part 152F of this embodiment will be described. Regarding the characteristic part 152F, a technology targeted at a pachinko game machine capable of setting a setting value with different advantageous degrees for a player, such as a winning probability of a jackpot, by a setting means will be described as follows. The game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103) also functions as a setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different advantageous degrees for a player as a setting value for the winning probability of a jackpot.

First, let us explain the setting values. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in this example is configured so that the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed according to the setting values by someone at the gaming facility (such as a gaming facility staff member) using a specified switch or other operating means to change the settings.

For example, in the game control microcomputer 100 (CPU 103), a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot set in the pachinko game machine 1 to be changed in response to a setting change operation. As a result, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, a setting change process is executed that allows the probability of winning a jackpot to be changed by using a display result judgment table according to the setting value. The setting value consists of six levels (multiple levels) from 1 to 6, for example, and the probability of winning a jackpot increases in the order of setting value 1 < setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. In other words, when setting value 1 is set as the setting value, the player has the lowest advantage, and the advantage increases stepwise in the order of setting value 2 < setting value 3 < setting value 4 < setting value 5 < setting value 6. Note that the setting value may be set in multiple levels and is not limited to six levels. In this way, by making it possible to change the probability of winning a jackpot, the payout rate (number of balls paid per unit time (number of winning balls)) changes, so changing the setting value can also be said to change the payout rate.

For example, in the pachinko gaming machine of this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot changes depending on the setting value selected by the setting change operation when the power is turned on. Of the six setting values, for example, setting values 4 to 6 may be called high settings, which have a high probability of winning a jackpot, and setting values 1 to 3, for example, may be called low settings, which have a low probability of winning a jackpot.

The probability of selecting a type of jackpot may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern type may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot. The probability of selecting a variation pattern may also be changeable by setting values 1 to 6, just like the probability of winning a jackpot.

Regarding the characteristic section 152F, in a pachinko game machine that can set any one of a plurality of set values, when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state, a reserved consecutive win may be executed in which reserved information determined to be controlled to a win (jackpot or small win) is stored in the RAM 122 as a reserved memory buffer. Specifically, a reserved consecutive win refers to a consecutive win (reserved consecutive wins) within a reserved information range in which there is reserved information that will be a win in the future among the reserved information that exists when a jackpot occurs, and the next win occurs consecutively within the reserved information that existed at the time of the jackpot occurrence after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, in the case of a small win, a jackpot via a small win is generated based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of the small win can be said to be reserved memory information of a win that will be a jackpot in the future. When such a reserved consecutive win is executed, a notification effect that notifies the player that the reserved consecutive win is a reserved consecutive win may be executed.

Figure 8-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F. In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 152F, the reference symbols and explanations for the same configuration as in the front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in Figure 1 are omitted, and only the different parts are explained.

In the game area where the game balls can flow down after being thrown, a first path of the game balls' flow paths is provided mainly in the area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path of the game balls' flow paths, which is different from the first path, is provided mainly in the area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A with a first start winning hole is provided as a structure into which a game ball hit into the left game area of the game area can enter. The winning ball device 6A is disposed below the image display device 5. The winning ball device 6A is provided with a first start winning hole switch 22A for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start winning hole.

The passing gate 41, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the V-determination winning device 87 are provided as structures through which game balls that have been hit into the right playing area of the playing area can enter. The variable winning ball device 6B has a second start winning port through which game balls can enter. In addition, as switches for detecting game balls that have entered each port, a gate switch 21 is provided inside the passing gate 41, a second start winning port switch 22B is provided inside the second start winning port, and a V-winning switch 87a, a V-determination winning switch 15a, and a V-determination discharge switch 15b are provided inside the V-determination winning device 87.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The passing gate 41 is a gate structure through which the game ball can enter (pass). When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol changes and is displayed. The normal symbol will be described later. In the left game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the first start winning hole of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the first start winning hole, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. In the right game area, the game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the second start winning hole of the winning hole structure and the passing gate 41. Therefore, when aiming to have the game ball enter the second start winning hole and the passing gate 41, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

The V-judging winning device 87 is a device for judging the V-winning of the game ball, which is a condition for generating a big win when a small win occurs.

The V-judgment winning device 87 is made of a transparent material, and the game ball passing through the inside can be seen. The V-judgment winning device 87 has a width in the front and back directions at the top that allows the game ball to pass through, and walls are provided on both sides (the front and back sides) of a passage that slopes from right to left and extends in the left and right directions, and a guide path along which the game ball is guided is formed. In the center of the guide path, an operating port is formed as an opening that can allow a total of about 10 or more game balls to enter during the specified open period by repeatedly opening and closing for a specified period (for example, 0.1 seconds x 10 opening periods + 1 second closing period (interval period) x 9 times + 1 second end period) when a small win occurs. In the passage of the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87, multiple protrusions are provided alternately on both sides of the wall as deceleration means for decelerating the game ball being guided, forming a structure (hereinafter referred to as a deceleration structure) in which the game ball flows slowly in the passage above the operating port at the top of the V-determination winning device 87 when hit from the right.

In the small win game state, the opening control of the V-determination winning device 87 is executed for a relatively long period of time until the entry of 10 game balls into the V-determination winning device 87 is detected or until a predetermined period of time has elapsed. In the V-determination winning device 87, the portion of the induction path where the operating port is not formed forms a fixed passage called the fixed portion 873. At a position where the operating port can be opened and closed, a movable portion 872 that can move forward and backward on the operating port is provided.

The movable part 872 is driven by the solenoid 22 and can move back and forth to open and close the operating port. When the operating port is closed due to the state of the movable part 872, the game ball can pass through the upper surfaces of the movable part 872 and the fixed part 873 as a guide path, and is guided along the guide path from the right end to the left end and falls from the left end. When the operating port is open due to the operating state of the movable part 872, the operating port opens on the guide path, so that the game ball guided along the guide path can fall from the operating port into the inside of the V-determination winning device 87.

Inside the V-determination winning device 87 (operating port), a specific V winning area 870 is provided in the center of the left-right direction at the bottom of the V-determination winning device 87 as a winning area where game balls entering from the operating port can win, and further, a ramp is provided that guides all game balls that enter from the operating port onto the V winning area 870 via an inclined path. The V winning area 870 has a V winning port through which game balls can enter, and is capable of guiding game balls that enter from the V winning port downward.

At the top of the winning opening (V winning opening) of the V winning area 870, a plate-like opening/closing member (not shown) is provided that can switch the V winning area 870 to either an open state or a closed state. The opening/closing member is driven by a solenoid 22 and can move forward and backward to open and close the V winning opening. When the opening/closing member is in the open state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 is able to fall into the V winning area 870. On the other hand, when the opening/closing member is in the closed state, the game ball guided onto the V winning area 870 passes over the opening/closing member and is set up in a manner that opens near the downstream side of the V winning area 870, and is able to fall into the winning ball area (not shown) that can guide the game downward.

Specifically, the V winning area 870 of the V-judgment winning device 87 is basically in an open state, and in a small win game state in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open, when one game ball enters the V winning area 870 and wins, the game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a provided in the V-winning area 870. In a small win game state, when one game ball is detected by the V-winning switch 87a, the opening and closing member is controlled to a closed state, and game balls guided onto the V-winning area 870 thereafter enter the winning ball area. Game balls that enter the winning ball area are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a provided in the winning ball area. As a result, of the game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87, one game ball is detected by the V-judgment winning switch 87a, and the subsequent game balls are detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

When the total number of balls detected by the V-winning switch 87a and the V-judgment winning switch 15a reaches 10, the V-judgment winning device 87, which is opened during a small win game state, closes its operating port and is placed in a state where game balls cannot enter. The V-winning area 870 and the winning ball area are configured to merge below, and game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 through the merged discharge passage are discharged to a specified discharge path inside the game board 2. The discharge passage is provided with a V-judgment discharge switch 15b that can detect discharged game balls, and all discharged game balls are detected by this switch.

When a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, if a game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period, the conditions for a big win are met and the game is controlled to a big win game state. Such a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 is called a V-winning. In the pachinko game machine 1, as described above, during the period when a small win occurs and the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened, the structure and control are designed so that an average of about 10 game balls in total can enter the V-judgment winning device 87 without requiring any special operation, and further, the structure is designed so that when a game ball can enter the V-judgment winning device 87, the game ball always (100%) enters the V-winning area 870. In addition, in the pachinko game machine 1, when a small win occurs, a right-hit promotion notification is executed to instruct the player to hit to the right so that the player can easily hit the game ball into the V-determination winning device 87.

Therefore, when a small win occurs, unless the player does not shoot the game ball while the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is open, or the player hits with the left hand, if the player hits with the right hand, the game ball will always (100%) enter the V winning area 870 and a big win will occur.

In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a deceleration structure for the game ball is provided in the V-determination winning device 87. However, instead of providing such a deceleration structure, an operating port that allows the game ball to fall into a part of the guide path for the game ball in the V-determination winning device 87 may be provided, and the operating port may be opened 10 times to allow about 10 game balls to enter the V-winning area 870 during the small win game state.

In the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B and the V-determination winning device 87, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter either the variable winning ball device 6B or the V-determined winning ball device 87, but from the standpoint of gameplay, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering either of them.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the play area. In the special variable winning ball device 7, game balls hit to the right are guided by game nails planted in the right play area. In addition, the special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that game balls cannot enter from the left play area, depending on the state in which the game nails are planted.

The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening whose front is covered by a rectangular door, and when a big win occurs, a solenoid causes the door to tilt forward around the base as an axis, revealing (opening) the large winning opening. A count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered is provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7. The winning route to the special variable winning ball device 7 is restricted by game nails and other structures so that the game ball can enter the large winning opening only when the game ball is shot into the right game area. It is also possible to make it possible for the game ball to enter the large winning opening regardless of whether it is shot into the left game area or the right game area.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the special variable winning ball device 7 with the large winning opening and the V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win are different devices, but this is not limited to the above, and the special variable winning ball device 7 with the large winning opening and the V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win may be a common device.

For example, a V-judgment winning device 87 for judging a V-win may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 that has a large winning opening. In this case, the game ball that enters the large winning opening will enter the V-judgment winning device 87 as is.

A jackpot occurs when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A, and when a jackpot pattern (jackpot display result) is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the first start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A. When a jackpot is determined by lottery based on a game ball entering the second start winning slot, a jackpot pattern is derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B.

A big win also occurs when a game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 when the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small win game state enters the V-winning area 870. Hereinafter, a game ball entering the V-winning area 870 and being detected by the V-winning switch 87a is called a V-winning. A small win is a win in which the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 opens as a predetermined value, and a big win can occur on the condition of a V-winning. In the V-judgment winning device 87, a game state in which the operating port opens is called a "small win game state." And a big win that occurs based on a game ball entering the V in a small win game state is called a "big win via a small win." In contrast, a big win game state that is entered based on the display result of the variable display of the special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B is called a "big win by a special pattern."

The jackpot game state is a specific game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player as a predetermined value is awarded, and a repeat continuation control is performed in which the special variable winning ball device 7 repeats an open state and a closed state a predetermined number of times. In the repeat continuation control, the state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is open (the big winning opening is open) is called a round. The repeat continuation control is also called round control.

In the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, and then closed when a predetermined end condition for the open state is met (either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed in the open state, or a predetermined number of winning balls (e.g., 10) have been generated). When the open end condition is met, a continuation right is generated and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened again. The generation of the continuation right is repeated until the number of times the device is opened in the jackpot game state reaches a predetermined upper limit of 15 rounds (the final round).

The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is started when the first start condition (first execution condition) or the second start condition (second execution condition), which is the execution condition for the variable display, is met (for example, when the game ball passes through the first start winning port or the second start winning port as the start winning area (including winning)), and the start condition for the variable display is met (for example, when the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not being executed and a jackpot game is not being executed), and the display result (stopped symbol) is derived and displayed after the variable display time (change time) has elapsed. The game ball passing through means that the game ball has passed through an area that has been determined in advance as a winning area, such as a winning port or gate, and is a concept that includes the game ball entering the winning port (winning). The display result is derived and displayed means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed (determined display).

In addition, for variable displays where the game ball has entered a start area such as the first start winning port and the second start winning port but the start conditions have not yet been met, storing information about the variable displays where the start conditions have not yet been met within a specified upper limit number is called reserved memory. The term reserved memory is also used to indicate (specify) the reserved information. Reserved memory is also called start memory or start winning memory.

For the first special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the first reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the first start winning port. For the second special symbol, the variable display is performed based on the second reserved memory, which is a reserved memory based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second start winning port. If a jackpot occurs when such a first reserved memory or second reserved memory exists, the reserved memory that existed before the jackpot occurs is maintained as is, and is used for the variable display after the jackpot gaming state ends.

When a second start winning occurs at the second start winning slot, even if there is a reserved memory of a first start winning, the variable display of the second special symbol based on that second start winning is executed with priority. In this way, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special 2 priority consumption" as appropriate).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which special 2 priority digestion was performed, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and special 2 priority digestion does not have to be performed.

For example, (A) the display of the first special symbol may be executed in priority over the display of the second special symbol (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "Special 1 priority consumption"); (B) the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol may be executed simultaneously (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "Special 1 and Special 2 simultaneous consumption").

Above the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, there is provided a second reserve display device 25B consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning port, i.e., the second reserve memory number. The second reserve display device 25B increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the second special pattern display device 4B, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

Further above the second reserve display 25B, there is a first reserve display 25A consisting of four displays that show the number of valid winning balls that entered the first start winning port, i.e., the first reserve memory number. The first reserve display 25A increases the number of lit displays by one each time there is a valid start winning. And, each time a variable display is started on the first special pattern display device 4A, the number of lit displays is decreased by one.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game state and presentation state are controlled so that the player can enjoy a variety of games by shooting the game ball in either a "left hit" aimed at the left playing area or a "right hit" aimed at the right playing area depending on the game situation. The flow of the game after the player starts playing the pachinko gaming machine 1 is explained below.

When a player sits down at the pachinko game machine 1 and starts playing for the first time, he or she first plays by hitting the ball from the left so that the ball will enter the first start winning hole. Then, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and if the display result is a jackpot (a jackpot with a special symbol), the player switches from hitting the ball from the left to hitting the ball from the right, and plays by aiming at the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens. After the jackpot game state ends, a right-hit promotion notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, encouraging the player to play by hitting the ball to the right. Specifically, a message such as "Aim to the right" is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

During the jackpot game state, the player plays a game in which the player hits the ball with the right hand to aim at the opened special variable winning ball device 7. During the jackpot game state, a right hand hit promotion notification is made. After the jackpot game state ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, which will be described later, the player continues to play by hitting the ball with the right hand. After the jackpot game ends, if the game enters a time-saving state, a time-saving notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state will begin if the game is in a time-saving state. In addition, during the time-saving state, a right hand hit promotion notification is also made. If the game does not enter a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, the game is played by switching from right hand hit to left hand hit so that the game ball will enter the first start winning hole as the right hand hit promotion notification executed during the jackpot game state ends. In addition, if the game does not enter a time-saving state, a left hand hit promotion notification (also called a left hand hit notification) may be made on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage the player to play by returning to left hand hit.

During the time-saving state after the end of the big win game, the player plays by hitting the right hand to aim at the variable winning ball device 6B having the second start winning port. If the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a big win (a big win with a special pattern), the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the special variable winning ball device 7. Also, if the game ball enters the second start winning port and the display result is a small win display result, the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 is opened in the small win game state, so the player continues to hit the right hand to aim at the V-determination winning device 87. At the start of the small win game state, a small win start notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the small win game state has started. In addition, when the game is controlled to a small win game state, a right-hit promotion notification is also issued at a specific timing (depending on the game situation, at the start of the small win display that is executed before the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened in response to a small win, or at a specified timing before the small win display is executed).

When the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to the small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the inside of the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V-winning has occurred. In addition, when the small win game state ends, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the small win ends, the game enters a big win game state and the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened, so the player continues playing by hitting with the right hand, aiming for the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, when playing a game aiming at the V-judgment winning device 87 in a small win game state, if the game ball does not enter the V winning area 870 but enters a non-specific area other than the V winning area 870, a big win does not occur. When a V win does not occur during a small win game state like this, a V winning failure notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that a V win has failed. In addition, at the end of the small win game state, a small win end notification is made on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify that the small win game state has ended. Then, after the end of the small win game state, while the time-saving state continues, the player continues to play by aiming at the variable winning ball device 6B while still hitting from the right. When the time-saving state ends, the game is played by switching from hitting from the right to hitting from the left so that the game ball will win the first start winning hole. When the time-saving state ends, a time-saving end notification is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that the time-saving state has ended, and a left-hand hit promotion notification is displayed to encourage the player to return to left-hand play.

Figure 8-2 is a diagram showing a winning type table. The winning type table shows, for each winning type, the conditions for a winning jackpot to occur, the control state (game state) after the winning jackpot, the number of times the jackpot opens (number of rounds), and the opening time of each round in the winning jackpot. In this embodiment, the winning types include a 15R time-saving winning jackpot, a 4R time-saving winning jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot. The number in parentheses for a winning jackpot via a small winning jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball wins in the second start winning port provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small winning pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small winning pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small winning decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small winning game state, and the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state after the end of the small winning game state (big winning probability, small winning probability, base, described later) is the same as before the small winning. In a small win, a prize ball is paid out for a game ball that wins in the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small winning game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can be generated during the small winning game state, and it is set that about 30 prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When the V-judgment winning device 87 is opened and the game ball enters the V-judgment winning area 870 (V-winning) inside the V-judgment winning device 87, a big win occurs. Such a big win via a small win is called a small win via big win. A small win via big win includes a 16 (15) R time-saving big win via a small win, a 9 (8) R time-saving big win via a small win, and a 5 (4) R time-saving big win via a small win, which have different numbers of rounds in the big win. A small win that is linked to become a 16 (15) R time-saving big win is called a first small win. A small win that is linked to become a 9 (8) R time-saving big win is called a second small win. A small win that is linked to become a 5 (4) R time-saving big win is called a third small win.

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special symbol, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include the 15R pattern time-saving jackpot, which occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special symbol, and the 4R pattern time-saving jackpot.

In this way, jackpots include pattern jackpots that occur directly based on the varying display of the first or second special pattern, and small jackpots that occur by V entry via a small jackpot based on the varying display of the second special pattern. Each pattern jackpot and small jackpot is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7.

A 15R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R). A 4R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 4 times (4R). A 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determined prize-winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened 15 times (15R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the prize-winning device is opened for 16 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened 15 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 15R time-saving jackpot. The 9 (8) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 8 times (8R) on the condition of a V win. The 5 (4) R time-saving jackpot via small win is a jackpot in which the V-determined winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens 4 times (4R) on the condition of a V win. The winning device opens for 5 rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened 4 times, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as the 4R time-saving jackpot with respect to the pattern.

The time-saving state after the 4R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and the other in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total. The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 4R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

After a jackpot other than the 4R time-saving jackpot, two ending conditions are set: the second special symbol is displayed seven times, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed 11 times in total. The seven times of the time-saving state ending condition is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. In the second special symbol, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the ending condition of the seven times of the second special symbol is set to a number of times that the possibility of a small win occurring when the second special symbol is displayed is significantly higher than the 4R time-saving jackpot. This makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the occurrence of a small win and to increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of a small win.

The end condition of the first special symbol and the second special symbol being displayed 11 times in total is to ensure that even if the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) starts before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met, the display of the seven times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be displayed reliably. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the number of times the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, changes in the time-saving state, from starting the display of the first special symbol based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so that the game ball flowing down the first path is more advantageous to the player in terms of starting winning than the game ball flowing down the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of winning at the time of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path. Also, in a specific state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that is opened is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so that the game ball flowing down the second path is more advantageous to the player in terms of the occurrence of a big win than the game ball flowing down the first path.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning) are provided on the first and second paths, and in a low base state as the normal state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the first path than via the second path, and in other states such as a high base state, a big win game state, and a small win game state, it is easier to win at the variable winning port via the second path than via the first path, such that in the normal state, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path, and in other game states, it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path.

Figure 8-3 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. In Figure 8-3, the type of random number, update range, use, and addition conditions are shown. Each random number is used as follows.

(1) Random R: A random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot will be generated and whether or not a small jackpot will be generated. Random 1 is updated by 1 at 10 MHz, and is updated by incrementing from 0 to its upper limit of 65535, and then is updated by incrementing from 0 again. (2) Random 1: Determines the type of jackpot (type, 15R time-saving jackpot, 4R time-saving jackpot, 16(15)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, 9(8)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and 5(4)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot) and the jackpot pattern (for jackpot type determination, for jackpot pattern determination). (3) Random 2: Determines the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for fluctuation pattern type determination). (4) Random 3: Determines the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for fluctuation pattern determination). (5) Random 4: Determines whether or not a win based on a normal symbol will occur (for determining whether a win occurs based on a normal symbol). (6) Random 5: Determines the initial value of Random 5 (for determining the initial value of Random 5).

In this embodiment, the specific game state jackpot includes multiple types, such as a 15R time-saving jackpot, a 4R time-saving jackpot, a 16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 5 (4)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. Therefore, when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the value of the random number for jackpot determination (random R), or when a small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined to be one of these jackpot types based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). However, in the case of a jackpot via a small jackpot, if a V prize does not occur, the determined jackpot is invalid. Furthermore, when the type of jackpot is determined, the jackpot pattern is also determined based on the value of the random number for jackpot type determination (random 1). Therefore, random 1 is also a random number for determining the jackpot pattern. In addition, when the type of small win is decided, the small win symbol is decided at the same time. Therefore, Random 1 is also the random number used to decide the small win symbol.

Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern is determined by first determining the fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and then determining one of the fluctuation patterns included in the determined fluctuation pattern type using a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3). In this manner, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process. A fluctuation pattern type is a grouping of multiple fluctuation patterns according to the characteristics of their fluctuation modes. One or multiple fluctuation patterns belong to a fluctuation pattern type.

In this embodiment, the fluctuation patterns are classified into normal fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that do not involve a reach, and reach fluctuation pattern types, which are fluctuation pattern types that involve a reach.

Figure 8-4 is an explanatory diagram showing the first special chart hit determination table, the second special chart hit determination table, and various jackpot type determination tables. These tables are stored in ROM 101.

Figure 8-4 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the first special symbol hit determination table. The first special symbol hit determination table is a data table for determining a hit for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a hit determination value that is compared with random R is set. The "probability" shown in Figure 8-4 (A) indicates the probability (percentage) of a hit.

The probability of winning the first special symbol varies depending on the setting value. At setting 1 it is 1/199, at setting 2 it is 1/190, at setting 3 it is 1/180, at setting 4 it is 1/170, at setting 5 it is 1/160, and at setting 6 it is 1/150. Therefore, the probability of winning is highest in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6.

Figure 8-4 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the second special symbol hit determination table. The second special symbol hit determination table is a data table for making big hit and small hit determinations for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit determination value and a small hit determination value to be compared with random R are set. The upper section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the big hit determination table section, and the lower section in Figure 8-4 (B) is the small hit determination table section. The "probability" shown in the upper section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower section of Figure 8-4 (B) indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

The probability of a big win with the second special symbol varies depending on the setting value. It is 1/199 with setting 1, 1/190 with setting 2, 1/180 with setting 3, 1/170 with setting 4, 1/160 with setting 5, and 1/150 with setting 6. Therefore, the probability of a big win increases in the following order: setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. In contrast, the probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35 regardless of the setting value. A small win may be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to make the probability of a small win lower for the first special symbol than for the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random R) of the random number circuit 124 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the first special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the first special symbol will be a jackpot. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a jackpot. Then, when the extracted value does not match any of the jackpot determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small jackpot determination value set in the second special symbol hit determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small jackpot determination values, it is determined that the second special symbol will be a small jackpot. Deciding to have a small hit also means provisionally deciding to have a big hit via a small hit (it is written as provisionally deciding because if no V win occurs during the small hit, it will not be controlled as a big hit).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

Figures 8-4 (C), (D), and (E) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. Figure 8-4 (C) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special pattern. Figure 8-4 (D) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the jackpot type of a pattern jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special pattern.

The first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(C) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination, and has jackpot determination values corresponding to the "15R pattern time-saving jackpot" and the "4R pattern time-saving jackpot".The second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(D) has a value to be compared with the value of Random 1, and has a jackpot determination value corresponding to the "15R pattern time-saving jackpot".

Also, as shown in Figures 8-4 (C) and (D), the jackpot type judgment value is also used as a judgment value (jackpot pattern judgment value) that determines the jackpot patterns of the first special pattern and the second special pattern. For example, the judgment value corresponding to an "8R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "3". The judgment value corresponding to a "15R time-saving jackpot" is also set as a judgment value corresponding to the jackpot pattern "7".

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 1 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 1 matches, as the jackpot pattern. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

In the small hit via jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4(E), a numerical value to be compared with the value of Random 2 for jackpot type determination is set, which corresponds to each of "small hit via 16(15)R time-saving jackpot", "small hit via 9(8)R time-saving jackpot", and "small hit via 5(4)R time-saving jackpot". However, the jackpot type determined by the small hit via jackpot type determination table is a provisional jackpot type linked to each of the first small hit (16(15)R time-saving jackpot), the second small hit (9(8)R time-saving jackpot), and the third small hit (5(4)R time-saving jackpot), and is invalid if no V win occurs during the small hit game state.

Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of a presentation control command sent by the game control microcomputer 100. Figures 8-5 and 8-6 show the relationship between specific command data for the presentation control command and the command name and command specification. As shown in Figures 8-5 and 8-6, the game control microcomputer 100 sends various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 depending on the game control state.

The main commands in Figures 8-5 and 8-6 are explained below. Command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern to be displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (each corresponds to a variation pattern XX). When a unique number is assigned to each of multiple variation patterns, there is a variation pattern command that corresponds to each variation pattern identified by that number. "(H)" indicates a hexadecimal number. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives command 80XX (H), it controls the performance display device to start a performance that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol.

Commands 8C01(H) to 8C06(H) are display result specification commands that show display results including miss display results, jackpot type, jackpot display results for each small jackpot type, and small jackpot display results.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the first special pattern change should begin. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates that the display of the second special pattern change should begin. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern determination designation command that specifies that the display of the first and second special patterns should end.

Commands A001 to A005 (H) are jackpot start designation commands that specify the start of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is closed, indicating that the large prize opening has been opened for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX.

Commands A301 to A305 (H) are jackpot end designation commands that specify the end of the jackpot game state for each type of jackpot.

Command A401(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command A402(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command B000 (H) is a normal state designation command that specifies that the game state is normal (low base state). Command B001 (H) is a first time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is first time-saving state (high base state). Command B002 (H) is a second time-saving state designation command that specifies that the game state is second time-saving state (high base state).

Command C0XX(H) is a first reserved memory number specification command that specifies the first reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the first reserved memory number. Command C1XX(H) is a second reserved memory number specification command that specifies the second reserved memory number. The "XX" in command C0XX(H) indicates the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, when the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts the number of reserved memories, it sends a reserved memory number designation command that specifies the number of reserved memories after subtraction, but this is not limited to this, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command that specifies that the number of reserved memories is to be subtracted by 1 for each of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number may also be used.

Commands C2XX(H) and C3XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a fluctuation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first or second starting winning port. Of these, command C2XX(H) is a designation command that indicates whether or not a winning judgment result will be a jackpot, whether or not a small win will be made, and the type of jackpot judgment result. In addition, command C3XX(H) is a fluctuation type command that indicates the judgment result of which judgment value range the value of the fluctuation pattern type judgment random number falls into (fluctuation pattern type judgment result) among the winning judgment results.

Command C401 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the first small win. Command C402 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the second small win. Command C403 (H) is a command that specifies the start of the third small win. Command C501 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the first small win. Command C502 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the second small win. Command C503 (H) is a command that specifies the end of the third small win. Command C601 (H) is a V winning specification command that specifies that a V winning has occurred. Command C602 (H) is a V winning ball detection specification command that specifies that a winning ball (including both a V winning ball and a winning ball other than a V winning ball) has been detected in the V determination winning device 87.

In the game control microcomputer 100, a first reserved memory buffer is provided in the RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the first special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the first reserved memory number (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved memory buffer. The first reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

For the second special symbol, a second reserved memory buffer is provided in RAM 102 for storing reserved memory information for the second special symbol. A storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the second reserved memory count (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved memory buffer. The second reserved memory buffer stores a hardware random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), and software random numbers for determining the type of jackpot (Random 1), the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2), and the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 3).

Based on a win at the first start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the first start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the first reserved memory buffer. Based on a win at the second start winning port, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting random numbers from the random number circuit 124 and the random counter for generating software random numbers, and saving (storing) them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer. Specifically, based on a win at the second start winning port, these random numbers are extracted and saved (stored) in the second reserved memory buffer.

In this way, storing information about the start winning in the reserved memory buffer may be referred to as "reserved storage." Note that the random number for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (Random 2) and the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (Random 3) may be extracted when the special pattern begins to fluctuate, rather than being extracted at the time of the start winning and stored in advance in the reserved memory buffer.

Figure 8-7 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process executed as part of S101. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the first start port switch 22A is on (S1211). If the first start port switch 22A is not on, the process proceeds to S1221. If the first start port switch 22A is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the first reserved memory count counter for counting the first reserved memory count is 4) (S1212). If the first reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process proceeds to S1221.

If the first reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the first reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1213). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the first reserved memory buffer (S1214). In the process of S1214, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process that determines in advance at the time of the starting winning the result of the change display and the type of the change pattern when a change based on the starting winning of the detected first special symbol is subsequently executed (S1215).

In this embodiment, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port or the second start winning port, and various data obtained at the time of the start winning is stored as reserved memory information, and then the condition for starting the variable display is established, at the timing to start the variable display, in the normal special pattern processing (S110), a decision is made based on the reserved memory information regarding the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) that starts the variable display, as to whether the variable display result is a jackpot display result or not, and the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot determination value and the jackpot type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. Then, in the variable pattern setting processing (S111), the variable pattern (including the determination of the variable pattern type) is determined based on the variable pattern type determination value and the variable pattern determination value set in response to the various random number values described above.

On the other hand, apart from such a determination, the reserved memory information that stores various data obtained at the time of the start winning is read ahead at the timing before the variable display based on the start winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port is started, specifically, at the timing when the game ball starts winning into the first start winning port or the second start winning port (the timing when the reserved memory information is stored), and based on the reserved memory information read ahead, a winning time performance process is executed in which a determination is made in advance as to whether or not there will be a big win, whether or not there will be a small win, the type of big win, and the type of variation pattern based on the big win determination value, big win type determination value, and variation pattern type determination value set in response to the various random number values described above. By doing so, the performance control CPU 120 can predict the result of the variable display before the variable display of the performance pattern is executed, and based on the various determination results at the time of the start winning, it is possible to execute a pre-reading performance such as a pre-reading notice that warns of a big win (possibility of a big win) during the variable display of the performance pattern.

Then, based on the result of the winning performance process, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1216) and the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1217). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a first start winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1218), and also controls the sending of a first reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the first reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1219).

By executing the processes of S1216 and S1217, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 each time a start winning occurs in the first start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1216 to S1219, when a start winning occurs in the first start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a first start winning designation command, and a first reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the second start port switch 22B is on (S1221). If the second start port switch 22B is not on, the process ends. If the second start port switch 22B is on, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit (specifically, whether the value of the second reserved memory count counter for counting the second reserved memory count is 4) (S1222). If the second reserved memory count has reached the upper limit, the process ends.

If the second reserved memory count has not reached the upper limit, the CPU 103 increments the value of the second reserved memory count counter by 1 (S1223). Next, the CPU 103 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 124 or a counter for generating software random numbers, and storing them in a storage area in the second reserved memory buffer (S1224). In the process of S1224, a random number for determining a jackpot (Random R), a random number for determining a jackpot type (Random 1), a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern type (Random 2), and a random number for determining a fluctuation pattern (Random 3) are extracted and stored in the storage area.

Next, the CPU 103 executes a winning performance process similar to the winning performance process described in S1215 for the start winning of the detected second special symbol (S1225). Then, the CPU 103 controls the sending of a symbol designation command to the performance control CPU 120 based on the judgment result of the winning performance process (S1226), and controls the sending of a variable type command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1227). The CPU 103 also controls the sending of a second starting winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (S1228), and controls the sending of a second reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 by setting the value of the second reserved memory number counter to EXT data (S1229).

By executing the processes of S1226 and S1227, in this embodiment, regardless of the game state (game state such as high probability state, low probability state, high base state, low base state, jackpot game state, etc.), both the pattern designation command and the variation type command are always sent to the performance control CPU 120 every time a start winning occurs in the second start winning port.

In addition, in this embodiment, by executing the processes of S1226 to S1229, when a start winning occurs in the second start winning port, a set of four commands, namely, a pattern designation command, a variable type command, a second start winning designation command, and a second reserved memory number designation command, is sent all at once within one timer interrupt.

Figure 8-8 is a flow chart showing the normal special symbol processing (S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (S51). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, the processing ends.

If there is no reserved memory data in the reserved memory buffer in S51, the process ends after performing a process (S80) for sending a customer waiting demo designation command. On the other hand, if there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in S51, the CPU 103 checks whether there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer (S52). If there is reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is set to data indicating "second" (S54). On the other hand, if there is no reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the special symbol pointer is set to data indicating "first" (S53).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern and the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the first special pattern display device 4A displays the first special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the second special pattern display device 4B displays the second special pattern based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of S52 to S54, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the variable display of the second special pattern display device 4B based on the data of the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the variable display of the first special pattern display device 4A based on the data of the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (S56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. Also, when the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and erases the contents of the storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4. Also, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second pending memory number are extracted always matches the order of the second pending memory numbers = 1, 2, 3, 4.

The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command to the performance control CPU 120, based on the value of the reserved memory number counter pointed to by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (S59). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

In the normal special symbol processing, first, data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "first" indicating that processing is to be performed on the first special symbol, or data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second start winning slot, i.e., data indicating "second" indicating that processing is to be performed on the second special symbol, is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing is performed according to the data set in the special symbol pointer. Thus, it is possible to make it common to the cases where the first special symbol is the target and the case where the second special symbol is the target.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the random number buffer and executes the jackpot determination module (S61). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining a jackpot that was extracted in S1214 of the start port switch passing process or S1224 of the start port switch passing process and stored in the reserved memory buffer or random number buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or small jackpot determination value with the random number for determining a jackpot, and if they match, determines that a jackpot or small jackpot has occurred. In other words, it is a program that executes a process for determining a jackpot or a small jackpot.

In the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(A), or if the second special symbol matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 8-4(B), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it is determined that there is a jackpot (Y in S61), the process moves to S71. Determining whether or not there is a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also determining whether or not to treat the stopped symbol on the special symbol display as a jackpot symbol.

If it is determined in S61 that a jackpot has occurred (Y in S61), a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot is set (S71).

Next, it is determined whether the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st" (S72). If the special symbol pointer is pointing to "1st", the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (C) is selected (S73) and the process proceeds to S75. On the other hand, if the special symbol pointer is not pointing to "1st" (if it is pointing to "2nd"), the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (D) is selected (S74) and the process proceeds to S75.

In S75, using the jackpot type determination table selected in S73 or S74, the jackpot type corresponding to the value that matches the random number (RANDOM 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the jackpot type (S75), and the process proceeds to S81.

In addition, if the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) does not match any of the big win determination values in S61 (N in S61), it is checked whether the data set in the special symbol pointer is data indicating "second" to check whether the target of the big win determination is the variable display of the second special symbol (S76). If the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is not data indicating "second" (the variable display of the first special symbol), the process proceeds to S82 described later. On the other hand, if the data set in the special symbol pointer in S76 is data indicating "second" (the variable display of the second special symbol), the second special symbol hit determination table in FIG. 8-4 (B) is used to determine whether the value of the random number for determining a big win (random R) matches any of the small win determination values, thereby performing the small win determination process (S77). In other words, if the value of the random number (random R) for determining a big win matches any of the small win determination values shown in FIG. 8-4 (B) (Y in S77), it is decided that a small win will occur for the second special symbol. Then, if it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in S77), a small win flag indicating a small win will be set (S78).

After setting the small hit flag, the small hit via big hit type determination table in FIG. 8-4 (E) is selected (S79), and the big hit type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for big hit type determination stored in the random number buffer area is determined as the type of big hit via small hit (S80). Then, proceed to S81. On the other hand, if the value of the random number (RANDOM R) for small hit determination does not match any of the small hit determination values in S77 (N in S77), proceed to S82 described below.

In S81, data indicating the type of the jackpot determined in S75 or S80 is stored in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102 (S81), and the process proceeds to S82. For example, if the jackpot type is a "15R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "01" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type, and if the jackpot type is a "4R time-saving jackpot with a pattern", "02" is set in the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a "16 (15)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot", "03" is set in a temporary jackpot type buffer separate from the jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 9 (8)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, "04" is set in the temporary jackpot type buffer as data indicating the jackpot type. If the jackpot type is a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, the provisional jackpot type buffer is set to "05" as data indicating the jackpot type. Of these, data indicating a 16 (15) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, a 9 (8) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot, and a 5 (4) R time-limited jackpot via small jackpot are provisionally set as they are invalid data that will not result in a jackpot if no V win occurs during a small jackpot game state.

In S82, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set (S78). Specifically, if neither the big win flag nor the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is set to "-", which is a miss symbol. If the small win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the small win symbols "1", "5", or "9" according to the small win type selected and determined in S80. If the big win flag is set, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be one of the big win symbols "3" or "7" according to the big win type selected and determined in S75. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (S111) (S79).

Figure 8-9 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (S118). In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 operates the movable part 872 to the open state by controlling the solenoid 22 based on the opening mode of the small win, and starts the opening operation of the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S411). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a small win start designation command indicating that the small win game state is to start to the performance control CPU 120 (S412). Next, the CPU 103 sets the V-judgment winning number counter as a counting means to use the number of winnings in the V-winning area 870 in the small win opening state as the end condition of the opening state (S413). Specifically, in S413, the counter value of the V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" and the setting is made to count down the number of V-winnings. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win release process (S119) (S414).

Figure 8-10 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (S119) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 updates the small win opening control timer by subtracting -1 (S430). Next, in S435 described later, it is confirmed whether the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter, which counts the number of V winning balls, is "0" (S431). The V-judgment winning number counter is set to "10" by S413 in Figure 8-9, and when 10 V winning balls are counted, the count value becomes "0". If the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S430, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is not "0" in S430, it is confirmed whether the small win opening control timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S432).

If the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, proceed to S441. On the other hand, if the small win opening control timer has not timed out in S432, the solenoid 22 is controlled in accordance with the count value of the small win opening control timer based on the opening mode of the small win to operate the movable part 872 to an open state, and processing is performed to open and close the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S433).

Next, in order to determine whether a V winning has been detected by a game ball entering the V winning area 870, which is in an open state inside the V determination winning device 87, it is determined whether the V winning switch 87a is in an on state (S434). When it is in an on state in S434, it means that a V winning has been detected, and a V winning flag, which is set when a V winning is detected, is set (S435). Then, a process is performed to transmit a V winning ball detection designation command (S436). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of V winnings. Next, the solenoid is driven to operate the opening and closing member, changing the V winning port of the V winning area 870 from an open state to a closed state (S437), and proceeding to S439. As a result, when the first game ball that enters the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning hole of the V-winning area 870 is closed, and all game balls that enter the V-judgment winning device 87 thereafter are guided to the winning ball area and detected by the V-judgment winning switch 15a.

On the other hand, if the switch is not on in S434, it means that a V win has not been detected, and it is determined whether the V-judging win switch 15a is on (S438). If the switch is on in S438, the process proceeds to S439, and if the switch is not on in S438, the process ends.

In S439, the count value of the V-judgment winning ball number counter, which was set to "10" in S413 of FIG. 8-9, is counted down by "-1" (S439), and a process is performed to send a V-judgment winning ball detection designation command (S440). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V-judgment winning ball that has entered the judgment winning device 87 has been detected after the V-judgment winning ball has been detected, and it becomes possible to recognize the number of game balls that have entered the judgment winning device 87.

When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0" in S431, the small win V winning number has reached the upper limit value and the small win opening end condition has been established. When the small win opening control timer has timed out in S432, the small win opening end condition has been established due to the end of the small win opening control. In these cases, the CPU 103 controls the solenoid 22 to operate the movable part 872 to the closed state and closes the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 (S441). When the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter is "0", even if the V-judgment winning device 87 is in the middle of opening according to the opening mode of the small win, the V-judgment winning device 87 is forcibly closed according to the count value of the V-judgment winning number counter. When the small win opening control timer has timed out, the V-judgment winning device 87 is closed according to the end of the small win opening control in the opening mode of the small win.

Next, data corresponding to the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed is set in the V winning valid period timer (S442), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win end processing (S120) (S443), and the processing is terminated. This starts the timing of the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning after the V determination winning device 87 is closed. Note that since the specific period that is the valid period for the V winning is set in this way, the game ball can be detected even if it passes through the V winning area later than the time it normally passes through. In addition, since the specific period is set, even if someone tries to illegally win a prize in the V winning area, only that period is detected, so that fraud can also be prevented.

Figure 8-11 is a flowchart showing the small win end processing (S120) in the special pattern process processing. In the small win end processing, the CPU 103 updates the V winning validity period timer by subtracting 1 (S441) and checks whether the V winning validity period timer has timed out (timer value = 0) (S442).

When the V winning validity period timer has not timed out in S442, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag, which is set in S434 or S445 when a V winning has already been detected, is set (S443). If the V winning flag is set, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 87a is in the on state in order to determine whether or not a V winning has been detected, which occurs when a game ball enters the V winning area 870 during the V winning validity period (S444). If it is not in the on state in S444, the process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is in the on state in S444, it is when a V winning is detected during the V winning validity period, and the V winning flag indicating that a V winning has been detected is set (S445). Then, the process is performed to transmit a V winning designation command (S446), and the process is terminated. This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a V winning has occurred.

When the V winning validity period timer has timed out in S442, processing is performed to send a small win end designation command (S447). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that the small win has ended. Next, by changing the state of the solenoid 22, control is performed to open the opening and closing member and return the V winning area 870 (V winning port) to an open state (S447A). Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the V winning flag is set (S448). If the V winning flag is set in S448, it is determined that a big win has occurred, and the big win flag is set (S449).

As mentioned above, in the small win game state, if you hit to the right in response to the right hit promotion notification described below, you can make the game ball enter the V-determination winning device 87 with a probability of approximately 100%, and the game ball that enters the V-determination winning device 87 will always V-enter the V-winning area 870, and the V-winning flag will be set with a probability of approximately 100% (S435 in Figure 8-10). Based on this, the big win flag is set in S449, and the game is controlled to the big win game state.

Next, the CPU 103 formally stores the data indicating the type of jackpot via a small jackpot stored in the temporary jackpot type buffer in S81 in the jackpot type buffer in response to the determination that a proper jackpot has occurred due to the occurrence of a V win (S450). Then, the time-saving flag that was set at that time is temporarily reset (S451).

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start 3 command, a jackpot start 4 command, or a jackpot start 5 command according to the jackpot type corresponding to the data stored in S450 (S452). This allows the performance control CPU 120 to recognize that a jackpot game state is about to start. Next, a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (S453).

The jackpot opening pattern data stored in ROM 101 is also referenced, and opening pattern data indicating the opening mode, such as the number of openings (for example, 15 times, 8 times, or 4 times), opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and interval time (time for closing the large prize opening between rounds), depending on the type of jackpot, is set in a predetermined memory area formed in RAM 102 (S454). Of such data, the data on the number of openings is set in an opening counter for counting the number of openings. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (S114) (S455), and the process ends. As a result, when a V win occurs in the small jackpot game state, the game state transitions to the jackpot game state.

If the V winning flag is not set in S448, the big win game state does not occur, so the data indicating the big win type via small win stored in the temporary big win type buffer in S81 is erased (S456), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (S110) (S457), and the process ends. As a result, if a V winning does not occur in the small win game state, the game does not transition to the big win game state.

[Explanation of Feature 03TM]
[Jackpot type table]
FIG. 9-1 is a diagram showing a jackpot type table. In the jackpot type table, for each type of jackpot, the jackpot occurrence conditions, the control state (game state) after the jackpot, the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot, and the opening time of each round in the jackpot are shown. In this embodiment, the jackpot types are a 10R time-saving jackpot, a 3R time-saving jackpot, a 10(9)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot, and a 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot. The number in parentheses for the jackpot via a small jackpot indicates the number of times the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) opens.

A small win occurs when a game ball enters the second start winning hole provided in the variable winning ball device 6B and the display result of the second special pattern becomes a small winning pattern. The decision of whether or not to make the display result of the special pattern a small winning pattern is made in advance by random number lottery (special pattern small win decision). When a small win occurs, the game enters a small win game state, and the operating hole of the V-determination winning device 87 opens in an opening pattern with 10 openings and an opening time of 0.1 seconds. The game control state after the end of the small win game state (big win probability, small win probability, base, described later) is the same as before the small win. In a small win, prize balls are paid out for the game ball that entered the V winning area 870 in the V-determination winning device 87 during the small win game state. It is set that about 10 winning balls can occur during the small win game state, and it is set that prize balls can be paid out according to the winning balls.

When a game ball is placed in the operating port of the V-determination winning device 87 while the operating port is open, and the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 inside the V-determination winning device 87 (V-winning), a jackpot occurs. Such a jackpot that occurs via a small win is called a jackpot via a small win. Jackpots via a small win include a "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via a small win" and a "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via a small win", which have different numbers of rounds in the jackpot.

In this example, the small win that is linked to a potential "10 (9) R time-saving big win" is called the "first small win." The small win that is linked to a potential "3 (2) R time-saving big win" is called the "second small win."

On the other hand, a jackpot that occurs directly from the variable display of a special pattern, without going through a small jackpot, is called a pattern jackpot. Pattern jackpots include a "pattern 10R time-saving jackpot" that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first special pattern or second special pattern, and a "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot." In what follows, a "pattern 10R time-saving jackpot" will be referred to as a "pattern 10R jackpot" as appropriate, and a "pattern 3R time-saving jackpot" will be referred to as a "pattern 3R jackpot" as appropriate.

In this way, the jackpot includes a pattern jackpot that occurs directly based on the variable display of the first or second special pattern, and a small jackpot via small jackpot that occurs by V entry via a small jackpot based on the variable display of the second special pattern. Each of the pattern jackpots and small jackpots is a jackpot that is controlled to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends, and is called a time-saving jackpot. In this embodiment, the advantageous state that is advantageous to the player also includes the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7. Hereinafter, the "pattern 10R time-saving jackpot" and the "10 (9) time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" will be referred to as the "10R jackpot" as appropriate.

A 10R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened 10 times (10R). A 3R time-saving jackpot is a jackpot in which the large prize opening is opened three times (3R). A 10 (9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 is opened once (0.1 seconds x 10 times), and then the large prize opening is opened nine times (9R) on the condition of a V winning. Although the winning device is opened for 10 rounds, the large prize opening is actually opened nine times, and the player feels that the opening of the large prize opening is the same type of jackpot as a 10R time-saving jackpot. A 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via a small jackpot is a jackpot in which the V-determining winning device 87 opens once (0.1 seconds x 10 times) and then the large winning hole opens twice (2R) on the condition that a V win is achieved. The winning device opens for three rounds, but the large winning hole is actually opened twice, and the player feels that the opening of the large winning hole is the same type of jackpot as a 3R time-saving jackpot with a pattern.

The time-saving state after the 3R time-saving jackpot has two end conditions: one in which the second special symbol is displayed once, and another in which the first and second special symbols are displayed five times in total (not shown). The number of times for the time-saving end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a 100% rate. When the second special symbol is displayed once, a small win occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition in which the second special symbol is displayed once is set as the number of times that a jackpot via a small win may occur when the second special symbol is displayed once.

The number of times the second special symbol is displayed once as the time-saving end condition is set for the following reason. In the case of a 3R time-saving jackpot, the time-saving state (including the electric support state) is basically continued until the second special symbol is displayed once, but to display the second special symbol, it is necessary to hit the ball from the right to make the ball enter the passage gate 41 and open the variable winning ball device 6B, and in that state, the ball must enter the variable winning ball device 6B. It may take time to make the ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, and the first special symbol that has been reserved and stored may be displayed first.

Therefore, the end condition of the total number of times the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed five times is a condition for ensuring that one display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning of which up to four can be stored before the jackpot game state immediately after the start of the time-saving state and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met. In this way, it is possible to prevent the display of the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, from not being executed in the time-saving state, due to the display of the first special symbol is started based on the reserved memory based on the first start winning immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In addition, after the jackpot of the 10R time-saving jackpot, the 10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, and the 3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot, two end states are set: an end condition in which the number of times the second special pattern is displayed is 7, and an end condition (not shown) in which the total number of times the first special pattern and the second special pattern are displayed is 11. The number of times 7, which is the end condition of the time-saving state, is set in consideration of the fact that the game ball that entered the V-judgment winning device 87 enters the V-winning area 870 at a rate of 100%. In the variable display of the second special pattern, a small jackpot occurs at a rate of about 1/7. Therefore, the end condition of the number of times 7 times the second special pattern is displayed is set to a number that significantly increases the possibility of generating a jackpot via a small jackpot when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, compared to the 3R time-saving jackpot. This allows players to focus on the occurrence of a big win via a small win, and also increases the player's sense of anticipation regarding the occurrence of a big win via a small win.

The end condition of the total number of times the first and second special symbols are displayed is 11 times, for the same reason as in the case of the 3R time-saving jackpot. This is to ensure that the display of the seven changes in the second special symbol, which is likely to be determined as a jackpot advantageous to the player, can be executed even if the display of the first special symbol is started due to reserved memory based on the first start winning (up to four can be stored) before the jackpot game state begins and before the condition for starting the display of the second special symbol is met immediately after the start of the time-saving state.

In this embodiment, in the low base state, which is the normal state, the first start winning port is set so that winning can be made from the first path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the first path than the second path. On the other hand, in an advantageous state such as a big win game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of winning at the time of a big win. Also, in a special state such as a small win game state, the V-determined winning device 87 that opens is set so that winning can be made from the second path, so it is more advantageous for the player to have the game ball flow down the second path than the first path in terms of the occurrence of a big win.

In addition to the above comparison of advantages, for example, other winning ports (for example, other variable winning ports (which may be for starting winning or non-starting winning)) may be provided on the first and second paths, and in the normal low base state, the first path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the second path, and in other states such as the high base state, big win game state, and small win game state, the second path is more likely to result in a winning entry into the variable winning port than the first path. From other perspectives, a configuration may be adopted in which it is more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the first path in the normal state, and more advantageous for the player if the gaming medium flows down the second path in other game states.

[Random value]
FIG. 9-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 9-2, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the result of the special chart display, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, the random number value MR4 for determining the result of the normal chart display, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. In addition, in order to enhance the effect of the game, random number values other than these may be used. These random number values MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating by software using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built into the microcomputer 100 for game control, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the microcomputer 100 for game control. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

In this embodiment, the random numbers MR1 to MR5 are set to the ranges shown in FIG. 9-2, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ranges of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the settings set in the pachinko game machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The CPU 103 also executes a random number generation program to generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores not only the game control program but also various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of judgment tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various judgments and decisions. The ROM 101 also stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and a variable pattern table that stores a plurality of types of variable patterns that become the variable display mode of each pattern in the variable display of special patterns, normal patterns, etc.

[Display result judgment table]
9-3(1) and (2) are explanatory diagrams showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol and a display result determination table for the second special symbol. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

FIG. 9-3(1) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table for the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "display result determination table [for first special symbol]" where appropriate). The display result determination table [for first special symbol] is a data table for determining a jackpot for the first special symbol, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value is set to be compared with the random number value MR1. The "probability" shown in FIG. 9-3(1) indicates the probability (percentage) of a jackpot.
In this example, the probability of winning the first special symbol is 1/199.

Figure 9-3 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result judgment table for the second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as the "display result judgment table [for second special symbol]" where appropriate). The display result judgment table [for second special symbol] is a data table for making big hit and small hit judgments for the second special symbol, and is a table in which a big hit judgment value and a small hit judgment value are set to be compared with the random number value MR1. In Figure 9-3 (2), the upper row is the big hit judgment table section, and the lower row is the small hit judgment table section. The "probability" shown in the upper row indicates the probability (percentage) of a big hit, and the "probability" shown in the lower row indicates the probability (percentage) of a small hit.

In this example, the probability of a big win with the second special symbol is 1/199. The probability of a small win with the second special symbol is set to 1/7.35. A small win may also be set for the first special symbol. In such a case, it is desirable to set the probability of a small win with the first special symbol lower than that with the second special symbol. For example, the probability of a small win with the first special symbol may be set to 1/100.

When the CPU 103 detects a start winning entry into the first start winning entry port (first start winning entry) or a start winning entry into the second start winning entry port (second start winning entry), it extracts the count value (random number value MR1) of the random number circuit 104 at a predetermined timing. For the first start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the first special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that a jackpot has been determined for the first special symbol. For the second start winning entry, the extracted value is compared with the jackpot determination value set in the display result determination table for the second special symbol, and if the extracted value matches any of the jackpot determination values, it is determined that a jackpot has been determined for the second special symbol. Then, if the extracted value does not match any of the big win determination values, the extracted value is compared with the small win determination value set in the [second special symbol] display result determination table, and if the extracted value matches any of the small win determination values, it is decided that the second special symbol will be a small win. Deciding to make it a small win also means provisionally deciding to make it a big win via a small win (it is written as provisionally decided because if no V win occurs during the small win, it will not be controlled as a big win).

Deciding whether to get a big win or not means deciding whether to transition to a big win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern the big win pattern. Deciding whether to get a small win or not means deciding whether to transition to a small win game state, but also deciding whether to make the stopped pattern resulting from the variable display of the second special pattern the small win pattern.

[Big hit type determination table]
9-3(3), (4), and (5) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 9-3(3) is a jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the first special symbol. FIG. 9-3(4) is a jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the pattern jackpot when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot by the second special symbol. FIG. 9-3(5) is a small jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol used to determine the jackpot type of the small jackpot type of the small jackpot when the small jackpot is determined to be a small jackpot by the second special symbol.

The jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol in Figure 9-3 (3) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and jackpot determination values corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" are set.

Figure 9-3 (3) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after each jackpot corresponding to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" and a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot." The number of time-saving controls for a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 7, while the number of time-saving controls for a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 1.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [first special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 8 are assigned to a "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" (3%), and 9 to 299 are assigned to a "3R pattern time-saving jackpot" (97%).

The jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-3 (4) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol") contains a jackpot determination value that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination and corresponds to a "10R time-limited jackpot for the symbol."

Figure 9-3 (4) also shows the number of time-saving controls that are executed after a jackpot corresponding to the "10R pattern time-saving jackpot." The number of time-saving controls for the "10R pattern time-saving jackpot" is 7.

In this example, in the jackpot type determination table for the [second special symbol], of the MR2 determination value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 299 is assigned to the "10R time-limited jackpot" (100%).

The small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol in Figure 9-3 (5) (hereinafter referred to as the "small win via jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol") contains a value to be compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and jackpot determination values corresponding to "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" and "small win via 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot".

Figure 9-3 (5) also shows the number of time-saving controls executed after a jackpot corresponding to the "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" and the "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot." The "10(9)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" has 7 time-saving controls, and the "3(2)R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot" has 7 time-saving controls.

In this example, in the small win via jackpot type judgment table [for the second special symbol], of the MR2 judgment value range of 0 to 299, 0 to 149 is assigned to "small win via 10 (9) R time-saving jackpot" (50%), and 150 to 299 is assigned to "small win via 3 (2) R time-saving jackpot" (50%).

[Fluctuation pattern determination]
ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the multiple types of fluctuation patterns described above depending on the pre-determination result.

Here, we will explain the fluctuation pattern determination in the normal state. Specifically, two fluctuation pattern determination tables are prepared in advance: a fluctuation pattern determination table for "miss" that is used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is a "miss", and a fluctuation pattern determination table for "jackpot" that is used when it is determined in advance that the fluctuation display result is a "jackpot".

[For misses] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of "non-reach miss", the fluctuation pattern of "normal reach miss", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach miss".

[For jackpots] In the fluctuation pattern determination table, a predetermined random number value within the possible range of the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is assigned as a determination value for the fluctuation pattern of a "normal reach jackpot" and the fluctuation pattern of a "super reach jackpot".

＜Not within reach＞
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "non-reach miss" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", the reach state is not established and the final display result is notified as a "miss".

<Normal reach miss>
In this embodiment, in the variation pattern of "normal reach miss" among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "miss", after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "323", "545", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "miss" is displayed at a predetermined trigger (operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), thereby notifying the user that the final display result is a "miss".

In this embodiment, the push button 31B is composed of a valid operation portion that can accept operation by the player, and a non-valid operation portion that cannot accept operation by the player. In this example, the valid operation portion is a portion of the push button 31B that includes the word "PUSH" and can be pushed downward (operated), and the non-valid operation portion is a base portion that is provided below the valid operation portion and cannot be pushed in (operated).

<Normal reach jackpot>
In this embodiment, in the "normal reach jackpot" variation pattern among the variation patterns in which the final display result is a "jackpot", after the reach state is established, a combination of decorative symbols (e.g., "222", "777", etc.) corresponding to the display result being a "jackpot" is displayed at a predetermined trigger (such as operation of push button 31B, passage of a predetermined period of time, etc.), thereby notifying the player that the final display result is a "jackpot".

<Super reach miss/jackpot>
In this embodiment, in a variation pattern involving a super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot"), the final display result is confirmed and stopped by executing a super reach presentation that notifies whether or not a "jackpot" has been won.

(Super reach effect (battle effect))
In this embodiment, among the variation patterns involving super reaches, in the variation patterns of "super reach miss" and "super reach jackpot", after the reach state is established, it develops into a super reach, and a super reach performance (hereinafter referred to as "battle performance" as appropriate) is executed in which the ally character and enemy character battle to notify whether or not a "jackpot" has been won (see Figures 9-9 to 9-14).

If the final display result is a "miss," a presentation in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat presentation) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot," a presentation in which the ally character triumphs over the enemy character (victory presentation) is executed.

FIG. 9-4 is a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state.
As shown in Figure 9-4 (1), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table [for miss] in the normal state, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 900 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “non-reach miss”, 901 to 980 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “normal reach miss”, and 981 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of “super reach miss”.

In this embodiment, the variable display period for a "non-reach miss" is set to 5 seconds, the variable display period for a "normal reach miss" is set to 30 seconds, and the variable display period for a "super reach miss" is set to 90 seconds.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-4 (2), in the [jackpot] fluctuation pattern judgment table in the normal state, of the MR3 judgment value range 1 to 997, 1 to 50 are assigned to the "normal reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern, and 51 to 997 are assigned to the "super reach jackpot" fluctuation pattern.

In this embodiment, the variable display period for a "normal reach jackpot" is set to 45 seconds, and the variable display period for a "super reach jackpot" is set to 120 seconds.

As shown in Figure 9-4, when the display result is "miss," the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach (in this example, "normal reach miss") is selected is (980-901+1)/997 = approximately 8%, and the rate at which a fluctuation pattern with a super reach (in this example, "super reach miss") is selected is (997-981+1)/997 = approximately 1.7%.

On the other hand, when the display result is "jackpot", the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a normal reach (in this example, "normal reach jackpot") is selected is (50-1+1)/997 = approximately 5%, and the probability that a fluctuation pattern with a super reach (in this example, "super reach jackpot") is selected is (997-51+1)/997 = approximately 94%.

In this way, when a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a normal reach (in this example, either "normal reach miss" or "normal reach jackpot") is selected, the probability that the display result will be a "miss" is higher (normal reach jackpot (about 5%) < normal reach miss (about 8%)), and when a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach (in this example, either "super reach miss" or "normal reach jackpot") is selected, the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" is higher (super reach miss (about 1.7%) < super reach jackpot (about 94%)), so the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a "super reach" is executed than when a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a "normal reach" is executed.

(Specific Configuration of Display Control Unit)
FIG. 9-5 is a block diagram showing the display control unit 123. The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor) 1500, a CGROM (Character Generator ROM) 160, a VRAM (Video RAM) 170, and a drive circuit 180. When a display control command input from the performance control CPU 120 via the CPU interface 1520 is a command to read image data from the CGROM 160, the drawing circuit 1510 in the VDP 1500 reads necessary image data from the CGROM 160 via the CG bus interface 1530 and outputs it to the decoder 1550. The CGROM 160 stores image data that has been coded (compressed) using the MPEG2 (Moving Picture Experts Group phase 2) method or the like. The decoder 1550 expands the image data read from the CGROM 160 and writes the expanded image data to the material data RAM 1560.

The drawing circuit 1510 uses image data stored in the drawing material data RAM 1560 to generate frame image data for displaying one frame of an image on the image display device 5, and writes the generated data to the drawing area of the VRAM 170. In this embodiment, an object to be displayed, formed of a collection of polygons, is placed in a virtual three-dimensional space as necessary, texture mapping is performed on the object, and frame image data corresponding to an image obtained by projecting the object onto a virtual screen is generated by a rendering process. The drive circuit 180 outputs R (red), G (green), and B (blue) image signals and synchronization signals based on the frame image data in the drawing area to the image display device 5. The image display device 5 performs screen display using, for example, a dot matrix method that drives a large number of pixels.

The VDP 1500 may be a microprocessor for image processing, such as a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM 160 may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or may be configured using any of the non-volatile recording media, such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory.

Next, the display mode of the performance image using the object arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space will be described with reference to FIG. 9-6. As shown in FIG. 9-6, when drawing an image of an object, the VDP 1500 arranges the object OB to be displayed, which is formed by a set of polygons, in the virtual three-dimensional (x, y, z) space and performs texture mapping on the object. Then, the image obtained by the rendering process of the texture-mapped object is displayed on the image display device 5. Specifically, assuming that the object is viewed from a specific viewpoint EY, an image IM obtained by projecting the object onto a virtual screen SC arranged at a position a specific distance away from the viewpoint EY is calculated by a calculation process, and this image IM is displayed on the image display device 5 by controlling the drive circuit 180. Note that in this embodiment, the image IM projected onto the virtual screen SC is drawn by perspective projection.

(Examples of production using objects in virtual 3D space)
9-7 is an example of objects arranged in a virtual three-dimensional space. In this example, an ally character CA1 (hereinafter referred to as "ally CA1"), an enemy character CA2 (hereinafter referred to as "enemy CA2"), a tree BG1, and a building BG2 are arranged as objects at predetermined coordinates in the virtual three-dimensional space. In the following description, the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 may be collectively referred to as "characters", and the tree BG1 and the building BG2 may be collectively referred to as "background objects".

In the following description, the x-axis, which defines the coordinates of the virtual three-dimensional space, is an axis parallel to the line connecting ally CA1 and enemy CA2 (the direction in which the characters are lined up), and in this example, is an axis parallel to the direction in which the multiple trees BG1 are lined up and the direction in which the multiple buildings BG2 are lined up. The y-axis is an axis perpendicular to the x-axis and parallel to the height direction of each object. The z-axis is an axis perpendicular to the x-axis and y-axis.

In the example of Figure 9-7, ally CA1 is located at coordinates (x1, y1, z1) and enemy CA2 is located at coordinates (x2, y2, z2) in the virtual three-dimensional space. Here, it is assumed that x1<x2, y1<y2, and z1=z2. Furthermore, tree BG1 and building BG2 are located in opposing positions with the character in between.

The camera position shown in Figure 9-7 corresponds to the viewpoint position when rendering the object. In Figure 9-7 (1), the camera position is set to a position that overlooks both ally CA1 and enemy CA2 from slightly above, and this viewpoint is called the outer viewpoint (OE). When the outer viewpoint is set, a virtual screen SC is set between both characters and the outer viewpoint, and the generated image IM includes both ally CA1 and enemy CA2 (see the first part of the second half of SP Reach described below).

The outer viewpoints include a first outer viewpoint (OE1), a second outer viewpoint (OE2), a third outer viewpoint (OE3), and a fourth outer viewpoint (OE4). The display control unit 123 can change the position of the virtual screen SC in response to switching of the outer viewpoint, thereby changing the angle at which the image displayed on the screen, i.e. the character, is viewed from above (see the first part of the second half of the SP Reach described below).

In the example of FIG. 9-7(1), the first to fourth outer viewpoints are each shown as having different coordinates, but some or all of these outer viewpoints may have common coordinates. In other words, for the outer viewpoints, only the position of the virtual screen SC (the direction of the line of sight from the viewpoint, the projection position of the object) may be changed without changing the viewpoint coordinates.

In Figure 9-7 (2), the camera position is set between friendly CA1 and enemy CA2, and this viewpoint is called the inside viewpoint (IE). When the inside viewpoint is set, the virtual screen SC is set between one character and the inside viewpoint, or between one background object and the inside viewpoint, and the generated image IM includes one character or neither character, and one background object or neither background object. In other words, when the inside viewpoint is set, both characters are never displayed at the same time, and both background objects are never displayed at the same time (see the second part of the second half of the SP Reach described below).

The inner viewpoints include a first inner viewpoint (IE1), a second inner viewpoint (IE2), a third inner viewpoint (IE3), and a fourth inner viewpoint (IE4). The display control unit 123 can change the position of the virtual screen SC in response to switching of the inner viewpoint, thereby changing the image displayed on the screen, i.e., which character is displayed (or none of the characters are displayed) and which background object is displayed (or none of the background objects are displayed) (see the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach described below).

In the example of FIG. 9-7(2), the first to fourth inner viewpoints are each shown as having different coordinates, but some or all of these inner viewpoints may have common coordinates. In other words, for the inner viewpoints, only the position of the virtual screen SC (the direction of the line of sight from the viewpoint, the projection position of the object) may be changed without changing the coordinates of the viewpoint.

In response to the start of the display of the special symbols, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the display of the decorative symbols in the central area of the screen, and starts the display of the small symbols in the upper left area of the screen. In response to the end of the display of the special symbols and the derived display of the display result, the combination of decorative symbols that will be the display result is fixed and stopped in the central area of the screen, and the combination of small symbols that will be the display result is fixed and stopped in the upper left area of the screen.

When the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach (SP reach), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance hides or reduces the display of the combination of decorative symbols that have become a reach state at the timing when the reach state develops into an SP reach (the timing when the transition to the battle performance occurs) after the reach state is established. Note that the small symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner in the upper left area of the screen before and after the development of the SP reach.

Figure 9-8 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each effect after the development of an SP reach. "T" in the figure indicates timing. Figure 9-9 is a diagram showing a specific example of an effect corresponding to the first half of an SP reach. The effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display of decorative symbols based on the SP reach variable pattern, and after the reach state is established, executes a battle effect in which ally CA1 and enemy CA2 battle as an SP reach effect.

The performance control CPU 120 starts a battle performance in which ally CA1 and enemy CA2 battle at the timing of the development of the SP reach (Fig. 9-8: T1). In response to the start of the battle performance, a battle start image including ally CA1 and enemy CA2 is displayed on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-9: (1)).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays an ally introduction image that includes ally CA1 but does not include enemy CA2 on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-8: T2, Fig. 9-9: (2)), and then displays an enemy introduction image that includes enemy CA2 but does not include ally CA1 on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-8: T3, Fig. 9-9: (3)). Here, the battle start image, ally introduction image, and enemy introduction image are all images that differ from images generated based on objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space, and are flat images that do not include background objects and give a relatively poor sense of depth.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space, on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-8: T4, Fig. 9-9: (4)). The first battle image is an image generated based on the first outer viewpoint (OE1), and is a three-dimensional image that gives a sense of depth, with ally CA1 on the left, enemy CA2 on the right, tree BG1 in front of the character, and building BG2 behind the character. In Fig. 9-9, at the timing when the images (1) to (3) are switched to (4), the objects displayed on the screen change from a two-dimensional appearance to a three-dimensional appearance, which increases the impact of the battle performance towards the latter part of the SP reach.

The above battle start image through the first battle image are images displayed in the first half of the SP reach. Note that in the first half, images generated based on a virtual three-dimensional space may be used for one or more of the battle start image, ally introduction image, and enemy introduction image. For example, an image based on the first or third outer viewpoint may be used as the battle start image (e.g., (5), (7), (9) in FIG. 9-10, described later), an image based on the first inner viewpoint may be used as the ally introduction image (e.g., (11) in FIG. 9-11, described later), and an image based on the third inner viewpoint may be used as the enemy introduction image (e.g., (13) in FIG. 9-11, described later).

Next, in response to the transition to the second half of the first part of the SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a second battle image including objects over a wider range than the first battle image, based on a zoom back process targeted at the character display area of the first battle image in FIG. 9-9 (4) (FIG. 9-8: T5, FIG. 9-10: (5)). This expands the overhead area from the first outer viewpoint, making it possible to create a performance effect by utilizing a wide range of the virtual three-dimensional space.

In addition, in this second battle image, effects are superimposed on the fists of ally CA1 and enemy CA2, respectively, to notify the player that a battle between ally CA1 and enemy CA2 is about to take place, and to suggest that if ally CA1 wins the battle, it will be a "jackpot," and if enemy CA2 wins the battle, it will be a "miss."

From this second battle image onwards, the character's lines are displayed in the line caption ST at the bottom of the screen, and the character's voice (character voice) corresponding to the lines displayed in the line caption ST is output from speakers 8L, 8R. The likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on the content of the lines, and also varies depending on the appearance of the line caption ST and the appearance of the lines displayed in the line caption ST (color, size, pattern, etc.), making it possible to diversify the presentation related to the lines.

In this example, ally CA1's lines "Take that!" are displayed in the line caption ST, and ally CA1's voice ("Take that!") is output from speakers 8L, 8R. The line caption ST and lines can be superimposed on objects (characters, background objects), and are more visible than objects. The relationship of visibility (display priority) is line > line caption ST > object (character, background object).

Next, an effect is produced in which ally CA1 and enemy CA2 approach each other and throw a punch at each other. That is, in the virtual three-dimensional space, the distance in the x-axis direction between ally CA1, who has raised his fist, and enemy CA2 decreases. The effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a third battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space (Figure 9-8: T6, Figure 9-10: (6)). The third battle image is an image generated based on the second outer viewpoint (OE2), and is a three-dimensional image in which ally CA1 is located at the upper left, enemy CA2 at the lower right, tree BG1 at the lower left, and building BG2 at the upper right.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays a fourth battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space, on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-8: T7, Fig. 9-10 (7)). The fourth battle image is an image generated based on the third outer viewpoint (OE3), and is a three-dimensional image in which the ally CA1 is on the right, the enemy CA2 is on the left, the tree BG1 is further back than the character, and the building BG2 is in front of the character.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the fifth battle image, which is an overhead image of the virtual three-dimensional space, on the image display device 5 (Fig. 9-8: T8, Fig. 9-10 (8)). The fifth battle image is an image generated based on the fourth outer viewpoint (OE4), and is a three-dimensional image in which ally CA1 is located at the bottom right, enemy CA2 at the top left, tree BG1 at the top right, and building BG2 at the bottom left.

The series of display switching effects from the second battle image to the fifth battle image based on the viewpoint change from the first outer viewpoint to the fourth outer viewpoint (Figure 9-10 (5) to (8)) is an effect executed in the first part of the latter half of the SP reach. By executing the display switching effect based on the outer viewpoint, the player can get a bird's-eye view of the character and background objects, and can grasp the positional relationship of each object in detail.

After the viewpoint change from the second battle image to the fifth battle image is completed, a battle image is displayed that is an overhead image based on the same outer first viewpoint (OE1) as the second battle image, and in which ally CA1 and enemy CA2 are closer together than in the second battle image (Figure 9-10 (9)). By displaying this battle image before the transition to the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, it becomes clear that ally CA1 and enemy CA2 are getting closer together in the virtual three-dimensional space, which increases the tension and excitement of the battle.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes a whiteout performance that increases the brightness of the entire screen in response to the end of the second half of the first part of the SP Reach (Figure 9-8: T9, Figure 9-10 (10)). In the whiteout performance, a whiteout image WO is displayed, reducing the visibility of all objects, the ally CA1 and enemy CA2, as well as the tree BG1 and building BG2. After that, the viewpoint switches from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and the second half of the SP Reach begins.

In this way, when switching from an outer viewpoint to an inner viewpoint, the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space is reduced to make them difficult to see, thereby reducing the sense of incongruity caused by a large change in viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space and making the player more aware of the change in scene in the battle. Note that, as shown in FIG. 9-10 (10), the visibility of the dialogue caption ST and dialogue is not reduced by the whiteout effect and they are visible even during the execution of the whiteout effect, so the player recognizes that the battle itself is continuing. In other words, the relationship of visibility (display priority) is dialogue > dialogue caption ST > whiteout image WO > objects (characters, background objects).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a whiteout effect is executed at the timing when the viewpoint is switched from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and a whiteout image WO is displayed, thereby reducing the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space and making them difficult to see. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. A whiteout effect may be executed at the timing when the viewpoint is switched from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint, and a whiteout image whose transmittance can be changed in stages may be displayed, thereby gradually reducing the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space and making them difficult to see.

For example, in a configuration in which the transmittance of the whiteout image can be set to any value, the whiteout image may be displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 100% when the whiteout effect is executed, and the transmittance may be gradually decreased over time until the whiteout image is finally displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 0%. When the whiteout image is displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 100%, the visibility of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space is at its lowest and easily visible, and when the whiteout image is displayed in a display mode with a transmittance of 0%, the visibility of objects arranged in the virtual three-dimensional space is at its lowest and difficult to see.

With this configuration, when switching from an outer viewpoint to an inner viewpoint, the visibility of objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space can be gradually reduced to make them difficult to see, allowing the player to switch from the outer viewpoint to the inner viewpoint naturally without feeling uncomfortable.

Next, in response to the transition to the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, the performance control CPU 120 displays the sixth battle image, which is an image based on a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, on the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-8: T10, FIG. 9-11 (11)). The sixth battle image is an image generated based on the first inner viewpoint (IE1). The first inner viewpoint is set between ally CA1 and enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the first inner viewpoint and ally CA1, so that the generated image displays ally CA1 large in the center, and other objects (enemy CA2, tree BG1, building BG2) are not displayed. The player can grasp the facial expression and movements of ally CA1 in detail. Here, an aura-like effect is added to ally CA1's fist, giving the impression that the power of the punch is strengthened, making the battle more powerful.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 changes the lines displayed in the line caption ST in response to the transition to the second part of the latter half of the SP reach. In this example, the line of ally CA1, "Go!!!" is displayed in the line caption ST, and the voice of ally CA1 ("Go!!!") is output from speakers 8L and 8R.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a seventh battle image, which is an image based on a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Fig. 9-8: T11, Fig. 9-11 (12)). The seventh battle image is an image generated based on the second inner viewpoint (IE2). The second inner viewpoint is set between ally CA1 and enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the second inner viewpoint and the tree BG1, so that the generated image shows the tree BG1 large, and does not show other objects (ally CA1, enemy CA2, building BG2).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 displays the eighth battle image, which is an image based on a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space, on the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-8: T12, FIG. 9-11 (13)). The eighth battle image is an image generated based on the third inner viewpoint (IE3). The third inner viewpoint is set between the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the third inner viewpoint and the enemy CA2, so that the generated image displays the enemy CA2 large in the center, and the other objects (ally CA1, tree BG1, building BG2) are not displayed. The player can grasp the facial expression and movements of the enemy CA2 in detail. Here, an aura-like effect is added to the fist of the enemy CA2, giving the impression that the power of the punch is strengthened, making the battle more powerful.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to display a ninth battle image, which is an image based on a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (Fig. 9-8: T13, Fig. 9-11 (14)). The ninth battle image is an image generated based on the fourth inner viewpoint (IE4). The fourth inner viewpoint is set between ally CA1 and enemy CA2, and the virtual screen SC is set between the fourth inner viewpoint and building BG2, so that the generated image shows building BG2 large, and does not show other objects (ally CA1, enemy CA2, tree BG1).

The series of display switching effects from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image based on the viewpoint change from the first inner viewpoint to the fourth inner viewpoint (Figure 9-11 (11) to (14)) is executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach. By executing the display switching effects based on the inner viewpoint, the player can grasp the state of each object in detail.

The display periods of the sixth and eighth battle images, in which characters are displayed, are set to be longer than the display periods of the seventh and ninth battle images, in which no characters are displayed and only background objects are displayed. For example, the ratio of the display periods of the former to the latter is approximately 2:1 to 4:1. In this way, a situation is created in which the player is more likely to focus on the characters than on the background objects.

The series of display switching effects from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image based on the inner viewpoint is repeated multiple times in the second part of the latter half. The first display switching effect (Fig. 9-8: T10 to T14, Fig. 9-11 (11) to (14)) has a cycle of 10 seconds, whereas the second display switching effect (Fig. 9-8: T14 to T18, Fig. 9-11 (15) to (18)) has a cycle of 9 seconds.

Furthermore, the period of the third display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T18 to T22, Fig. 9-12 (19) to (22)) will be 5 seconds, the period of the fourth display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T22 to T26, Fig. 9-12 (23) to (26)) will be 2 seconds, and the period of the fifth display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T26 to T30, Fig. 9-13 (27) to (30)) will be 1 second.

In this way, when a display switching effect based on an inside viewpoint is repeatedly executed multiple times, the cycle of the display switching effect executed later is made shorter than the cycle of the earlier executed display switching effect, and by gradually shortening the cycle, it is possible to increase the sense of speed of the battle and make it more exciting. Also, by shortening the cycle of the display switching effect, it is possible to suggest that the announcement of victory or defeat is approaching.

In this embodiment, from the third display switching performance to the fifth display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T18 to T30, Fig. 9-12 (19) to (26), and Fig. 9-13 (27) to (30)), a normal button performance related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed. In the normal button performance, a spiral effect UEF (hereinafter referred to as the "swirl effect UEF") is superimposed on each of the repeatedly displayed sixth to ninth battle images, and from the fourth display switching performance (period 2 seconds) to the fifth display switching performance (period 1 second), an operation preview display, which is an image imitating push button 31B, is emphasized.

When the normal button performance begins, during the third display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T18 to T22, Fig. 9-12 (19) to (22)), a swirl effect UEF is superimposed on each of the sixth to ninth battle images, reducing the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. Here, the display of the swirl effect UEF also reduces the visibility of the dialogue caption ST and the dialogue. This differs from the whiteout image WO described above, and by drawing attention to the swirl effect UEF rather than the dialogue, it is easier to direct attention to the operation preview display and operation unit (push button 31B) described below.

Next, in the fourth display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T22 to T26, Fig. 9-12 (23) to (26)), a vortex effect UEF is continuously superimposed on each of the sixth to ninth battle images, and the first type of operation preview display BTA1 is displayed in the center of the vortex. The first type of operation preview display BTA1 is thinner and has lower visibility than the second type of operation preview display BTA2 described below.

Next, in the fifth display switching performance (Fig. 9-8: T26 to T30, Fig. 9-13 (27) to (30)), the swirl effect UEF continues to be superimposed on each of the sixth to ninth battle images, and the display mode of the operation notice display displayed in the center of the swirl changes from the first mode to the second mode. The second mode of operation notice display BTA2 is darker and has higher visibility than the first mode of operation notice display BTA1.

In this way, the operation preview display BTA2 of the second mode is highlighted over the operation preview display BTA1 of the first mode, thereby notifying the player that some kind of effect will be performed using the operation unit (push button 31B). In addition, for each of the sixth to ninth battle images, the operation preview display is displayed together with the swirl effect UEF, suggesting that the outcome of the battle will be announced by operating the operation unit (push button 31B) indicated by the operation preview display.

When the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach ends, the game moves to the third part of the latter half shown in FIG. 9-15. Here, the performance control CPU 120 displays an operation prompting display BT1 in the center of the screen, which prompts the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B) (FIG. 9-8: T30, FIG. 9-14 (31)). The operation prompting display BT1 is a display in which a display prompting the player to operate is added to the second mode of the operation notice display BTA2, and is formed via the second mode of the operation notice display BTA2.

In this example, the operation prompting display BT1 is formed by adding the words "PUSH!!" and a downward arrow above the second mode operation advancement display BTA2, and adding a time bar below it indicating the valid period for the operation. Here, because ally CA1 and enemy CA2 are displayed in the background of the operation prompting display BT1, the player operates the operation part in the hope that ally CA1 will win by operating the operation part.

The performance control CPU 120 ends the display based on the viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional space when the SP reach transitions from the second part of the latter half to the third part of the latter half (when the operation prompt display BT1 is completed). This causes the player to pay attention to the operation prompt display BT1 rather than the character, and to concentrate on operating the operation section. Therefore, the character displayed in Figure 9-14 (31) is not displayed based on the viewpoint of the virtual three-dimensional space, but is a flat image.

When the variable display result of the special symbol is a "jackpot" (when the fluctuation pattern is a jackpot fluctuation pattern), the CPU 120 for controlling the performance executes a victory performance when the player operates the operation unit. In the victory performance, the ally CA1 is displayed large in the center of the screen, the movable body YM is moved from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position), and a common combination of decorative symbols ("333" in this example) is stopped in the lower area of the screen (Figure 9-8: T31, Figure 9-14 (32A)). When the movable body YM is in the advanced position, the area in which the ally CA1 is hidden (covered by the movable body YM) is larger from the player's perspective than when it is in the retreated position, making it difficult to see the ally CA1. The relationship of visibility (display priority) in Figure 9-14 (32A) is movable body YM > decorative symbol > ally CA1.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the victory presentation includes a presentation that displays ally CA1 and a combination of decorative symbols indicating a jackpot, and a presentation that moves movable body YM from a retreated position (first position) to an advanced position (second position), but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the victory presentation may include other presentations.

For example, the winning effect may include an effect in which a background image including rainbow colors, which is a display color that suggests that the display result is a "jackpot," is displayed, and an effect in which the movable body YM moves from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position). In this case, the effect in which a background image including rainbow colors is displayed and the effect in which the movable body YM moves from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position) may be executed at the same time or at different times.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 moves the movable body YM from the advance position (second position) to the retreat position (first position), and, in response to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") that indicates a "jackpot" in the lower area of the screen (Figure 9-8: T32-T33, Figure 9-14 (33A)). This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot has occurred as a result of winning the battle.

On the other hand, if the variable display result of the special symbol is a "miss," when the player operates the operation unit, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a defeat presentation. In the defeat presentation, the enemy CA2 is displayed large in the center of the screen, the movable body YM is not moved from the retreating position (first position) to the advancing position (second position), and a combination of decorative symbols ("323" in this example) in which at least one symbol is different from the other symbols is stopped in the lower area of the screen (Figure 9-8: T31, Figure 9-14 (32B)). The relationship of visibility level in Figure 9-14 (32B) is decorative symbol > enemy CA2.

Next, the presentation control CPU 120, in response to the end of the variable display of the special symbols, fixes and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "323") that indicates a "miss" in the lower area of the screen (Figure 9-8: T32-T33, Figure 9-8 (33B)). This allows the player to recognize that a jackpot did not occur due to a loss in the battle.

(Chance Up Production)
Next, the chance-up effect executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach will be described. The chance-up effect is an example of a notice effect that suggests (notices) that the game will be controlled to a big win game state based on the variable display of the special symbol (decorative symbol) being executed. The chance-up effects in this embodiment include a first chance-up effect using the ally CA1, a second chance-up effect using the enemy CA2, a third chance-up effect using the notice telop YT and the movable body YM, and a fourth chance-up effect using the dialogue telop ST.

(First chance up effect)
In the first chance-up performance, the effect applied to the fist of ally CA1 is a special effect that is larger than the normal effect. For the player, the larger aura surrounding the fist of ally CA1 increases the expectation that ally CA1 will win against enemy CA2.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 9-15 (1A) to (4A), among the sixth to ninth battle images, in the sixth battle image in which ally CA1 is displayed, the effect added to ally CA1's fist is a special effect. On the other hand, in the eighth battle image in which enemy CA2 is displayed, the effect added to enemy CA2's fist is a normal effect (smaller in size than the special effect). This suggests that ally CA1's punch is more powerful than enemy CA2's punch, and the player recognizes that ally CA1 has a higher chance of defeating enemy CA2 compared to when the effect added to ally CA1's fist is a normal effect.

(Second chance up effect)
In the second chance-up performance, the effect applied to the fist of the enemy CA2 is erased. The player can recognize that the fist of the ally CA1 is covered by an aura, while the fist of the enemy CA2 is not covered by an aura, and thus the player can recognize that the ally CA1 is in a relatively advantageous position, and the player has an increased expectation that the ally CA1 will win against the enemy CA2.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 9-16 (1B) to (4B), among the sixth to ninth battle images, in the sixth battle image in which ally CA1 is displayed, a normal effect is added to the fist of ally CA1. On the other hand, in the eighth battle image in which enemy CA2 is displayed, no effect is added to the fist of enemy CA2. This suggests that the punch of enemy CA2 is weaker than that of ally CA1, and the player recognizes that ally CA1 has a higher chance of defeating enemy CA2 compared to when an effect is added to the fist of enemy CA2.

(Third chance up effect)
In the third chance up performance, a preview caption YT is displayed on the character's screen. The preview caption YT contains either the message "CHANCE" or "Super Hot", and the expectation of a big win varies depending on the message contained in the preview caption YT. In this embodiment, when the preview caption YT2 of the second aspect in which the message "Super Hot" is set is displayed, the expectation of a big win is higher than when the preview caption YT1 of the first aspect in which the message "CHANCE" is set is displayed.

In this embodiment, as shown in Figures 9-16 (1A) to (4A) and Figures 9-16 (1B) to (4B), the preview caption YT is added to the lower left and upper right areas of the screen in the sixth battle image in which ally CA1 is displayed and the eighth battle image in which enemy CA2 is displayed, among the sixth to ninth battle images. In the examples of Figures 9-16 (1A) and (3A), "CHANCE" is set as the message of the preview caption YT, and in the examples of Figures 9-16 (1B) and (3B), "Super Hot" is set.

By displaying the preview caption YT, the area enclosed by the preview caption YT is emphasized and attracts attention, compared to when the preview caption YT is not displayed. In this embodiment, by executing the third chance up performance, the preview caption YT is displayed and the movable body YM moves from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position).

When the movable body YM is in the retreated position (first position), ally CA1 is displayed in the area sandwiched between the preview captions YT, and therefore the preview captions YT can emphasize ally CA1 (improve the visibility of ally CA1). On the other hand, when the movable body YM moves to the advanced position (second position) (state of Figures 9-16 (1A) and (1B)), the movable body YM is located in front of ally CA1 (toward the player), and therefore the visibility of ally CA1 is reduced by the movable body YM.

(4th chance up effect)
In the fourth chance-up effect, the probability of a big win is indicated by the display mode of the dialogue telop ST. In this embodiment, when the dialogue telop ST2 in the red band mode is displayed, the probability of a big win is higher than when the dialogue telop ST1 in the blue band mode is displayed.

In this embodiment, the dialogue caption ST is displayed continuously from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image, as shown in Fig. 9-17 (1A) to (4A) and Fig. 9-17 (1B) to (4B), and is added to the lower area of the screen. In the example of Fig. 9-17 (1A) to (4A), the dialogue caption ST1 is set in a blue band, and in the example of Fig. 9-17 (1B) to (4B), the dialogue caption ST2 is set in a red band.

In the examples of Figures 9-17 (1B) to (4B), the line displayed in the red-band line caption ST2 is the line of ally CA1 saying "Go for it!", which is the same as the line displayed in the blue-band line caption ST1 in Figures 9-17 (1A) to (4A), but the difference in the color of the line caption suggests that there is a higher chance of winning.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the fourth chance up effect, which suggests that the probability of a jackpot is high, is executed by changing the background color of the dialogue caption. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. The fourth chance up effect, which suggests that the probability of a jackpot is high, may be executed by changing the display color of an object that is different from the background color of the dialogue caption.

For example, a fourth chance up effect may be executed, suggesting a high probability of winning by changing the display color of the characters included in the dialogue caption. For example, when the fourth chance up effect is not being executed, the characters "Ike!!!" are displayed in black, but when the fourth chance up effect is being executed, the characters "Ike!!!" are displayed in blue or red. In this case, it is suggested that the probability of winning is higher when the characters "Ike!!!" are red than when they are blue.

Regarding the above-mentioned first chance up performance to fourth chance up performance, the visibility of at least the objects (characters, background objects) is not reduced in the sixth performance image to the ninth performance image. Here, in the third chance up performance, ally CA1 is initially highlighted by the preview caption YT, but while the movable body YM is in the advancement position, the visibility of ally CA1 is reduced by the movable body YM.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
When the CPU 103 starts the varying display of the special pattern, it transmits a display result designation command that specifies the display result, a variation pattern designation command that specifies the variation pattern, and a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) to the performance control CPU 120.

When the display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) begins, the presentation control CPU 120 is able to determine that the display of the special pattern will be performed and to specify the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.) based on receiving from the game control microcomputer 100 a set of commands: a reserved memory number subtraction designation command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the reserved memory number has been subtracted; a display result designation command that specifies the display result (jackpot, or miss, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, etc.); and a change pattern designation command that specifies the time to change the special pattern and the content of the presentation (reach, pseudo-consecutive, etc.).

In addition, when the variable display of the special pattern has ended and the display result has been determined, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine that the variable display of the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) has ended and the display result has been derived based on receiving a pattern determination command from the game control microcomputer 100.

Figure 9-18 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of the change in this embodiment. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process at the start of the change shown in Figure 9-18 in the variable display start setting process (step S171) of the effect control process shown in Figure 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the above set of commands accompanying the start of the change display of the special pattern, it sets an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute an effect) for executing the change display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the change display of the special pattern based on the display result designation command and the change pattern designation command, and determines the effect to be executed (and the effect not to be executed) during the change display of the decorative pattern based on the designated change pattern by the change start effect determination process shown in Figure 9-18.

First, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command (the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display to be executed) is a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach ("super reach miss", "super reach jackpot") (step S03TM1010). If the fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach (NO in step S03TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process as it is.

If the fluctuation pattern is one that involves a super reach (YES in step S03TM1010), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the first chance up performance based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the first chance up performance (see FIG. 9-19 (1)) (step S03TM1020).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the second chance up performance based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the second chance up performance (see FIG. 9-19 (2)) (step S03TM1030).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode based on a table (see FIG. 9-19 (3)) for determining whether or not to execute the third chance up performance and the performance mode (step S03TM1040).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode (see FIG. 9-19 (4)) (step S03TM1050), and ends the processing.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which any one of the first chance up effects through the fourth chance up effects can be executed in one variable display, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In one variable display, if any one of the first chance up effects through the fourth chance up effects is executed, the execution of the other chance up effects may be restricted.

For example, in the process of determining the effects at the start of fluctuation, a process of determining whether or not the CU restriction flag described below is set (hereinafter referred to as the "CU determination process") is executed before the process of determining whether or not various chance-up effects are executed (steps S03TM1020, S03TM1030, S03TM1040, and S03TM1050).

If the CU restriction flag is set (if it has been decided that one of the chance up effects will be executed), the process of deciding whether or not to execute the next chance up effect is skipped, and if the CU restriction flag is not set (if it has not been decided that any of the chance up effects will be executed), the process of deciding whether or not to execute the next chance up effect is executed. The CU restriction flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision that a chance up effect will be executed in the process of deciding whether or not to execute various chance up effects.

This configuration can prevent the effects during the SP reach from becoming too complicated due to multiple chance-up effects being executed in a short period of time.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the performance at the start of fluctuation]
Figures 9-19 (1) to (4) are examples of tables that are referenced when determining whether or not to execute various effects and the mode of the effects in the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the first chance up effect>
Figure 9-19 (1) is an example of a first chance up performance execution decision table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the first chance up performance in step S03TM1020 of the performance decision process at the start of fluctuation.

Figure 9-19 (1) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not to execute the first chance-up effect. As shown in Figure 9-19 (1), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the execution rate of the first chance-up effect differs depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

If the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is a 90% chance that it will be decided not to execute the first chance up performance, and a 10% chance that it will be decided to execute the first chance up performance.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), there is a 70% chance that the first chance up effect will not be executed, and there is a 30% chance that the first chance up effect will be executed.

As shown in Figure 9-19 (1), the probability of winning is higher when the first chance up effect is executed than when the first chance up effect is not executed.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute second chance up effect>
Figure 9-19 (2) is an example of a second chance up effect execution decision table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the second chance up effect in step S03TM1030 of the effect decision process at the start of fluctuation.

Figure 9-19 (2) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a decision table for whether or not to execute the second chance-up effect. As shown in Figure 9-19 (2), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the execution rate of the second chance-up effect differs depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

If the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is a 90% chance that it will be decided not to execute the second chance up performance, and a 10% chance that it will be decided to execute the second chance up performance.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), there is a 70% chance that the second chance up effect will not be executed, and a 30% chance that the second chance up effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (2), the probability of winning is higher when the second chance up effect is executed than when the second chance up effect is not executed.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute third chance up effect and effect mode>
Figure 9-19 (3) is an example of a third chance up effect execution/non-execution and presentation mode determination table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the third chance up effect and the presentation mode in step S03TM1040 of the presentation determination process at the start of fluctuation.

Figure 9-19 (3) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not the third chance up effect is executed and the effect mode. As shown in Figure 9-19 (3), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the execution rate of the third chance up effect and the selection rate of the effect mode differ depending on whether the display result is "miss" or "jackpot."

If the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is a 90% chance that a decision will be made not to execute the third chance up performance, there is a 9% chance that a decision will be made to execute the third chance up performance in the chance mode, and there is a 1% chance that a decision will be made to execute the third chance up performance in the super hot mode.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), there is a 50% chance that the third chance up performance will not be executed, there is a 30% chance that the third chance up performance in the chance mode will be executed, and there is a 20% chance that the third chance up performance in the super hot mode will be executed.

In this embodiment, the preview caption displayed in the third chance up performance in the chance mode is an image containing the word "CHANCE" on a white background, and will hereafter be referred to as the "white preview caption", "white preview caption", or "chance mode preview caption" as appropriate. The preview caption displayed in the third chance up performance in the hottest mode is an image containing the word "hot" on a gold background, and will hereafter be referred to as the "gold preview caption", "golden preview caption", or "hot mode preview caption" as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (3), when the third chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the third chance up effect is not executed. Also, among the cases when the third chance up effect is executed, when the super hot third chance up effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the chance third chance up effect is executed.

<Table for determining whether or not to execute the fourth chance up effect and the effect mode>
Figure 9-19 (4) is an example of a fourth chance up performance execution/non-execution and performance mode determination table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute the fourth chance up performance and the performance mode in step S03TM1050 of the performance determination process at the start of fluctuation.

Figure 9-19 (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for determining whether or not the fourth chance-up effect is executed and the effect mode. As shown in Figure 9-19 (4), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the execution rate of the fourth chance-up effect and the selection rate of the effect mode differ depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

If the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), there is a 90% chance that a decision will be made not to execute the fourth chance up performance, an 8% chance that a decision will be made to execute the fourth chance up performance in the blue band mode, and a 2% chance that a decision will be made to execute the fourth chance up performance in the red band mode.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), there is a 70% chance that the fourth chance up performance will not be executed, there is a 20% chance that the fourth chance up performance in blue band form will be executed, and there is a 10% chance that the fourth chance up performance in red band form will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-19 (4), when the 4th chance up performance is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the 4th chance up performance is not executed. In addition, among the cases when the 4th chance up performance is executed, when the 4th chance up performance in the red band mode is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the 4th chance up performance in the blue band mode is executed.

[Holding continuous performance]
In this embodiment, when reserved information determined to be controlled to a "hit" (either a "big hit" or a "small hit") is stored in the reserved memory buffer RAM 122, it is referred to as a "reserved consecutive". In this embodiment, when a big hit occurs, the reserved information stored includes reserved information that will become a "hit" in the future, and after the big hit game state ends, a reserved consecutive performance can be executed to notify that the next "hit" will occur consecutively within the range of the reserved information stored at the time of the big hit. In addition, when the display result of the reserved information is a "small hit", it becomes a big hit via a small hit based on the occurrence of a V prize, so the reserved information of a small hit can be said to be reserved memory information of a hit that will become a big hit in the future.

The consecutive pending effects are effects that are executed when a predetermined number of game balls are detected to have won during a predetermined jackpot round of play while the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and they notify the player that consecutive jackpots are occurring using the image display device 5 and the attacker lamp.

<Image hold consecutive performance>
In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive performance that notifies the occurrence of consecutive jackpots using the image display device 5 is referred to as the "image reserved consecutive performance." The image reserved consecutive performance is a performance that notifies the occurrence of consecutive jackpots by displaying the letters "V GET" or reserved consecutive suggestion display including the letter "V" on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the sixth jackpot round game (the timing when the sixth jackpot round game starts, the timing when the entry of the fifth game ball into the big prize opening is detected, etc.) when controlled in a jackpot game state (see Figs. 9-24 (10B) to (12B)).

[Jackpot performance determination process]
Fig. 9-20 is a flow chart showing the effect determination process executed during a jackpot. The effect control CPU 120 executes the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-20 in the effect control process during a jackpot (step S176) of the effect control process shown in Fig. 7. Specifically, when the effect control CPU 120 receives a jackpot start designation command, it determines the effect to be executed during a jackpot (and the effect not to be executed) by the effect determination process shown in Fig. 9-20.

First, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the pending consecutive flag described below is set (step S03TM2010). If the pending consecutive flag is set (YES in step S03TM2010), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the reserved consecutive flag is not set (NO in step S03TM2010), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot" (either a "10R pattern jackpot" or a "10(9)R jackpot via small jackpot") (step S03TM2020). If the jackpot type is not a "10R jackpot" (either a "10R pattern jackpot" or a "10(9)R jackpot via small jackpot") (NO in step S03TM2020), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot" (either a "pattern 10R jackpot" or a "10 (9) R jackpot via a small jackpot") (YES in step S03TM2020), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether the second reserved memory count is 1 or more (step S03TM2030). If the second reserved memory count is not 1 or more (second reserved memory count = 0) (NO in step S03TM2030), the presentation control CPU 120 ends the process.

If the number of second reserved memories is 1 or more (number of second reserved memories ≧1) (NO in step S03TM2030), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not at least one of the display results of the second reserved memories is a "small win" or a "big win" (step S03TM2040). If all of the display results of the second reserved memories are a "miss" (NO in step S03TM2040), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If at least one of the display results in the second reserved memory is a "small hit" or a "big hit" (YES in step S03TM2040), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the consecutive image reserved presentation based on a table for determining whether or not to execute the consecutive image reserved presentation (see FIG. 9-21) (step S03TM2050).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the image hold consecutive performance (step S03TM2060). If it has been decided not to execute the image hold consecutive performance (NO in step S03TM2060), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

If it has been decided to execute the image hold consecutive performance (YES in step S03TM2060), the performance control CPU 120 sets the hold consecutive flag (step S03TM2070) and ends the processing.

In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive flag is a type of flag that is set based on the decision to execute an image reserved consecutive performance. When the reserved consecutive flag is set, the processing of steps S03TM2020 to S03TM2070 is skipped, so that it is possible to restrict a decision to execute a duplicate image reserved consecutive performance corresponding to a second reserved memory in a state where it has been decided to execute an image reserved consecutive performance corresponding to a second reserved memory whose display result is a "big win" or "small win" in the currently controlled big win gaming state. This reserved consecutive flag is erased when the big win gaming state when the reserved consecutive flag was set ends.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the performance during a big win]
<Table for determining whether or not to execute image hold consecutive performance>
Figure 9-21 is an example of a table that is referenced when determining whether or not to execute consecutive image hold effects in step S03TM2050 of the process for determining effects during a jackpot in this embodiment.

Figure 9-21 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a table for deciding whether or not to execute consecutive image hold effects. As shown in Figure 9-21, in this embodiment, the judgment values are assigned so that the selection ratio for whether or not to execute consecutive image hold effects differs.

In this example, there is a 50% chance that a decision will be made not to perform the continuous image hold performance, and a 50% chance that a decision will be made to perform the continuous image hold performance.

[Jackpot Round Play]
In this embodiment, in the jackpot round game when controlled to the jackpot game state, the jackpot round performance can be executed. In this embodiment, the jackpot round performance is a performance including any of the following: round number display performance, prize ball number display performance, music performance, music video performance, music selection performance, replay performance, replay video selection performance, or replay notice performance. The performance images (videos) related to the various performances of this jackpot round performance are called "jackpot round images" or "jackpot round videos".

Note that as the jackpot round effect, an effect different from the various effects described above (round number display effect, prize ball number display effect, music effect, music video effect, music selection effect, replay effect, replay video selection effect, replay preview effect, etc.) may be executed. An effect different from the various effects is, for example, a promotion suggestion effect that suggests that the number of jackpot rounds will be promoted, a mode suggestion effect that suggests the effect mode that will be controlled after the jackpot, etc.

<Round number display, prize ball number display>
The round number display effect is an effect in which a round display (e.g., the characters "1 Round") corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen of the image display device 5. The prize ball number display effect is an effect in which a prize ball number display (e.g., "00450 pt") showing the number of prize balls awarded in a jackpot game is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5.

<Music direction, music video direction>
In this embodiment, during the big win round play, it is possible to execute a music performance in which music is played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a music video performance in which a music video (image) corresponding to the music of the music performance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of music are provided as the music performance. In this example, three types of music, "music A", "music B", and "music C", are provided as the music performance, and a configuration is adopted in which the player can select the music to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the big win round play. Similarly, a plurality of types of images are provided as the images of the music video performance. In this example, three types of images, "image (A)" corresponding to the music A, "image (B)" corresponding to the music B, and "image (C)" corresponding to the music C, are provided as the images of the music video performance, and a configuration is adopted in which the player can select the image to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 together with the music. In this embodiment, the type of music corresponds to the type of image, so "selecting a music" is the same as "selecting an image".

<Music selection performance>
In this embodiment, during a jackpot round play, a music selection effect can be executed for the player to select a music piece to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. The music selection effect is an effect in which a music selection prompt display (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) for selecting a music piece to be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R during the jackpot round play and a selected music piece display (for example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Music A") showing the selected music piece are displayed in the lower left corner of the screen of the image display device 5, and the selected music piece is switched to when the player operates the operation unit (for example, a cross button (not shown) provided on the pachinko game machine 1).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the music in the music presentation and the music video in the music video presentation correspond to each other during the jackpot round play, but this is not limited to this form, and the music in the music presentation and the music video in the music video presentation do not have to correspond to each other during the jackpot round play.

For example, during a jackpot round, a music selection effect is executed to allow the player to select a song to be played from speakers 8L and 8R, and a video selection effect is executed to allow the player to select a music video to be displayed on image display device 5. In this case, for example, the player can select song A in the music selection effect, and video (C) that does not correspond to song A in the video selection effect.

<Replay Production>
In this embodiment, when the type of jackpot is a "10R jackpot"("10R pattern time-saving jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small jackpot"), a replay effect can be executed in which an image related to the super reach that was being executed in the changing display when the jackpot occurred (the changing display that was executed immediately before) (hereinafter referred to as "replay image" or "replay image" as appropriate) is displayed on the image display device 5 for a specified period of time during the jackpot round play.

The replay effect is an effect in which a replay image is displayed on the image display device 5 during the jackpot round play period from the 4th round to the 10th round when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot" ("10R pattern time-saving jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small jackpot")

The replay footage is footage related to the super reach (battle performance) that was executed in the previously executed variable display, and corresponds to one of the three chapters into which the battle performance is divided. As will be described in more detail below, in this embodiment, a replay footage selection performance can be executed in which the player selects which of the three chapters the footage corresponding to be displayed in the replay performance.

In this example, the images displayed as replay images are as follows:
It consists of three chapters: Chapter 1: The first half of the SP Reach; Chapter 2: The first half of the SP Reach; Chapter 3: The second and third half of the SP Reach.

(Chapter 1: The first half of the SP Reach)
Chapter 1 is an image corresponding to the first half of the SP reach, and in this example, is a series of produced images (images) from the battle start image to the first battle image as shown in FIG. 9-9.

(Chapter 2: The first part of the second half of the SP Reach)
Chapter 2 is a video corresponding to the first part of the second half of the SP reach, and in this example, it is a presentation video (image) of a series of display switching presentations from the second battle image → the third battle image → the fourth battle image → the fifth battle image → the second battle image → a whiteout image based on a switch in viewpoint from the first outer viewpoint to the fourth outer viewpoint as shown in Figures 9-10.

(Chapter 3: The second and third parts of the second half of the SP Reach)
Chapter 3 is an image corresponding to the second and third parts of the latter half of the SP Reach, specifically, a part of the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach and an image corresponding to the third part of the latter half of the SP Reach. In this example, the image corresponding to a part of the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach is a series of display switching effects from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image based on the switching of the viewpoint from the first inner viewpoint to the fourth inner viewpoint as shown in FIG. 9-11 (11) to (14), and is an effect image (image) of only the first display switching effect. Also, the image corresponding to the third part of the latter half of the SP Reach is an effect image (image) of a series of effects from the button effect (operation prompting display) to the victory effect as shown in FIG. 9-14.

In this embodiment, when a replay effect is executed, if various chance-up effects were executed in the previously executed variable display super reach (battle effect), it is possible to display a replay image including the effect image (image) of the executed chance-up effect.

For example, if a super hot 3rd chance up effect is being executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, when Chapter 3 is selected as the replay effect, a replay image including a preview caption of the 3rd chance up effect will be displayed.

However, in this embodiment, when a replay effect is executed, if various chance-up effects have been executed in the previously executed variable display super reach (battle effect), among the executed chance-up effects, those that reduce the visibility of the screen of the image display device 5 are restricted from being executed as replay effects (they are not executed in the replay effect).

For example, if a super hot third chance up effect is being executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, when Chapter 3 is selected as the replay effect, the effect of moving the movable body in the third chance up effect from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position) (hereinafter referred to as the "movable body effect" as appropriate) will not be executed.

When the movable body is in the advanced position, a larger area of the screen of the image display device 5 is hidden (covered by the movable body) from the player's perspective than when it is in the retracted position, making it difficult to see the screen of the image display device 5. The relationship of visibility is movable body > image display device. For this reason, by adopting a configuration that limits the execution of replay effects for effects that reduce the visibility of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the visibility of the round number and number of winning balls displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, which would reduce the interest of the jackpot game state.

<Replay video selection>
In this embodiment, a replay image selection effect can be executed in which the player selects which of the three chapters the image corresponding to be displayed in the replay effect.

The replay video selection effect is an effect in which, when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot" ("10R time-limited jackpot", "10 (9) jackpot via small jackpot"), a replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 during the replay video selection period (part of the jackpot fanfare period), and the words "Press the button to select the chapter of the battle replay!!" and a replay video selection prompt display BT1 are displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, and at a specified timing (for example, at the start of the first round), the chapter corresponding to the selected replay video icon is determined as the replay video.

In this example, the replay video selection icons are composed of a first replay video selection icon IC1 (an icon containing the text "Chapter 1"), a second replay video selection icon IC2 (an icon containing the text "Chapter 2"), and a third replay video selection icon IC3 (an icon containing the text "Chapter 3").

In this embodiment, the replay video selection icon is switched by the player operating the push button 31B. In this example, each time the player operates the push button 31B, the icon switches in the following order: first replay video selection icon IC1 → second replay video selection icon IC2 → third replay video selection icon IC3. When the player operates the push button 31B while the third replay video selection icon IC3 is selected, the icon switches again to the first replay video selection icon IC1. In addition, the selected replay video selection icon is displayed in an enlarged manner compared to unselected replay video selection icons.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the selected replay video selection icon was displayed in a larger size than the unselected replay video selection icons, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected replay video selection icon may be displayed in a different size than the unselected replay video selection icons.

For example, the selected replay footage selection icon may display a thumbnail of the selected replay footage inside the icon, and explanatory information about the selected replay footage (explanatory information about the chapter, for example, the text "Transformation Scene!!", the text "Battle Special Move Scene!!", the text "Battle Decision Scene!!", etc.) may be displayed near the icon (for example, to the right).

<Replay preview>
In this embodiment, when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot"("10R time-saving jackpot with pattern", "10 (9) jackpot via small jackpot"), a replay preview effect can be executed in which a replay preview display is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the user that a replay effect will be executed during a specified period of time during the jackpot round play.

The replay preview effect is a replay preview that displays the words "Next Round Battle Replay" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 during the third round of a big win round game.

[Example of a 3R jackpot round play]
Figure 9-22 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of various presentations during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is a "3R jackpot"("pattern 3R time-saving jackpot", "3 (2) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot")

As shown in FIG. 9-22 (1), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a jackpot start command and displays a jackpot start screen (in this example, the word "BONUS" corresponding to a 3R jackpot) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 9-22(2), when the CPU 103 opens the large winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, the performance control CPU 120 executes the big win round performance and displays a big win round image on the screen of the image display device 5. This big win round image includes an image including a round display (in this example, the characters "1 Round") corresponding to the big win round number in the upper left corner of the screen, a prize ball number display (in this example, "00450pt") showing the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game in the lower right corner of the screen, a song selection prompt display (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image imitating musical notes and the characters "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen, and a music video (in this example, the video (A) MV) that fills the entire screen.

[Example of a 10R jackpot round game]
Figure 9-23 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation modes of various presentations during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot"("pattern 10R time-saving jackpot", "10 (9) R time-saving jackpot via small jackpot")

In this example, the replay video selection effect selects the replay video of "Chapter 3," and the previously executed variable display super reach (battle effect) results in a super hot third chance up effect.

In addition, Fig. 9-24 (10A) to (12A) are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode when it has been determined in the jackpot presentation determination process that the consecutive image hold presentation will not be executed, and Fig. 9-24 (10B) to (12B) are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode when it has been determined in the jackpot presentation determination process that the consecutive image hold presentation will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-23(1), when the CPU 103 starts the jackpot game state, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a jackpot start command and displays a jackpot start screen (in this example, the words "MAX BONUS" corresponding to a 10R jackpot) on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (2), during the jackpot fanfare period, the performance control CPU 120 executes a replay video selection performance, and displays a replay video selection icon on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, and the text "Press the button to select the battle replay chapter!!" and a replay video selection prompt display BT1 on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, of the replay video selection icons, the third replay video selection icon IC3 (icon containing the text "Chapter 3") is displayed in a selected state (enlarged state), and the first replay video selection icon IC1 (icon containing the text "Chapter 1") and the second replay video selection icon IC2 (icon containing the text "Chapter 2") are displayed in an unselected state (not enlarged state).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23(3), when the CPU 103 opens the large winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7, the performance control CPU 120 executes a big win round performance and displays a big win round image on the screen of the image display device 5. This big win round image includes an image including a round display (in this example, the characters "1 Round") corresponding to the big win round number in the upper left corner of the screen, a prize ball number display (in this example, "00450pt") showing the number of prize balls awarded in the big win game in the lower right corner of the screen, a song selection prompt display (in this example, an icon imitating a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image imitating a musical note and the characters "Song A") in the lower left corner of the screen, and a music video (in this example, the video (A) MV) that fills the entire screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (4), at the timing when the CPU 103 opens the large winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the third round, the performance control CPU 120 executes a replay preview performance and displays a replay preview display (in this example, the words "Next Round Battle Replay") in the center of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, the following are displayed: a round display corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds in the upper left corner of the screen (in this example, the letters "3 Round"), a prize ball count display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game in the lower right corner of the screen (in this example, "00750pt"), an image including a song selection prompt display in the lower left corner of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A"), and a music video (in this example, the video (A) MV) filling the entire screen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), when the CPU 103 opens the large winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the fourth round, the performance control CPU 120 ends the replay preview performance, erases the replay preview display (in this example, the words "Next Round Battle Replay") from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, executes the replay performance, and displays the replay video RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 has selected and determined the replay video corresponding to Captor 3 in the replay video selection performance, and based on the fact that a super hot third chance up performance was executed in the variable display super reach (battle performance) executed immediately before, displays the sixth battle image including a preview caption of the third chance up performance as the replay video RV.

However, the performance control CPU 120 selected and decided the replay video corresponding to Capter 3 in the replay video selection performance, and although the previously executed variable display super reach (battle performance) executed a super hot third chance up performance, it did not execute the movable body performance in the third chance up performance, and did not move the movable body YM from the retreat position (first position) to the advance position (second position).

At this time, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds in the upper left corner of the screen (in this example, the letters "4 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game in the lower right corner of the screen (in this example, "00900pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display in the lower left corner of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (6), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the replay video, and displays the replay video RV (in this example, the seventh battle image including a preview caption for the third chance up performance).

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "4 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "00975pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (7), at the timing when the eighth battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the replay video and displays the replay video RV (in this example, the eighth battle image including a preview caption for the third chance up performance).

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "5 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "01050pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (8), at the timing when the ninth battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the replay video and displays the replay video RV (in this example, the ninth battle image including a notice caption for the third chance up performance).

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "5 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "01125pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (9), at the timing when the replay image should transition to the third part of the second half, the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the replay performance and displays the replay image RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays, as a replay image, an operation prompting display in the center of the screen urging the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B), and displays ally CA1 and enemy CA2 in the background of the operation prompting display.

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "6 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "01200pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

In this state, if the continuous image hold performance is not executed, proceed to Figure 9-24 (10A), and if the continuous image hold performance is executed, proceed to Figure 9-24 (10B).

(When image hold consecutive performance is not performed)
As shown in Figure 9-24 (10A), when the CPU 103 opens the large winning opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the sixth round, the presentation control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay presentation and displays the replay video RV.

At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects displays ally CA1 large in the center of the screen as a replay image, and also displays an effect image (video) related to the winning effect in which a common combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") stops in the lower area of the screen.

However, the presentation control CPU 120 does not execute a presentation that moves the movable body in the victory presentation, and does not move the movable body YM from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position).

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "6 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "01275pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11A), when the image corresponding to Capter 3 in the replay image ends, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the replay performance and displays the replay image RV.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the same image as the replay image that was previously displayed again from the beginning. The performance control of the performance image and the movable body YM displayed on the image display device 5 is the same as that shown in FIG. 9-23 (5), so a description thereof will be omitted.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video has ended, the same replay video as the previously displayed replay video is displayed again from the beginning. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video has ended, a video different from the previously displayed replay video may be displayed.

For example, a music video may be displayed after the video corresponding to each chapter of the replay video has finished, or a video suggesting the presentation mode that will be controlled after the jackpot has ended may be displayed.

At this time, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds in the upper left corner of the screen (in this example, the letters "8 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game in the lower right corner of the screen (in this example, "01500pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display in the lower left corner of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (12A), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay video should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues executing the replay video and displays the replay video RV (in this example, the seventh battle image including a notice caption for the third chance up performance).

In addition, the screen displays a round number corresponding to the number of jackpot rounds at the top left of the screen (in this example, the letters "8 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game at the bottom right of the screen (in this example, "01575pt"), and an image including a song selection prompt display at the bottom left of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a currently selected song display (in this example, an image resembling musical notes and the letters "Song A") are displayed.

(When image hold consecutive performance is executed)
Figures 9-24 (10B) to (12B) show examples of the presentation when the continuous image hold presentation is executed, but as the presentation images that are not related to the continuous image hold presentation are the same as those in Figures 9-24 (10A) to (12A), their explanations are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 9-24 (10B), when the CPU 103 opens the large winning hole of the special variable winning ball device 7 corresponding to the sixth round, the performance control CPU 120 executes an image hold consecutive performance and displays the hold consecutive suggestion display HR (in this example, the letters "V GET").

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11B), when the image corresponding to Capter 3 in the replay image ends, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the image hold consecutive performance and continues to display the hold consecutive indication display HR (in this example, the letters "V GET").

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-24 (11B), at the timing when the seventh battle image in the replay image should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 continues to execute the image hold consecutive performance, and continues to display the hold consecutive indication display HR (in this example, the letters "V GET").

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the chance-up effect performed using the image display device 5 can be executed in the replay video, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the chance-up effect performed using the image display device 5 may be restricted from being executed in the replay video.

For example, when a super hot 3rd chance up effect is being executed in a variable display super reach (battle effect) that was executed immediately before control was exercised to a jackpot game state, the replay image of the replay effect may be configured not to display the effect image (notice caption) related to the 3rd chance up effect.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which the image hold consecutive effects are executed in the sixth round of a jackpot round game, but the invention is not limited to this form, and the image hold consecutive effects may be executed at a timing other than the sixth round of a jackpot round game.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the consecutive image hold effect can be executed in each round of the jackpot round play, and a process may be performed at the start of the jackpot to determine in which round the consecutive image hold effect will be executed. With such a configuration, the player cannot know in which round of the jackpot round play the consecutive image hold effect will be executed, so the player can play the jackpot round with the expectation that the consecutive image hold effect may be executed in all rounds.

[Second embodiment]
[Board composition]
Figure 9-25 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine in the second embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 9-25, in this embodiment, an attacker panel 77 is provided on the front of the special variable winning ball device 7. This attacker panel 77 is formed of a transparent member, and is a device that allows the player to see the game ball passing through the inside (special variable winning ball device 7). It is provided with attacker lamps (first attacker lamp, second attacker lamp, third attacker lamp, fourth attacker lamp, fifth attacker lamp, sixth attacker lamp, seventh attacker lamp, eighth attacker lamp, ninth attacker lamp (see FIG. 9-26)), and is configured to be able to execute an attacker lamp light emission effect that causes the attacker lamps to light up (blink) at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the game ball enters the large winning hole, etc.). Note that the description of the same parts as in FIG. 8-1 is omitted.

[Attacker Lamp Configuration]
FIG. 9-26(1) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 in this embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 9-26 (1), the attacker panel 77 is provided with a first attacker lamp 77L1, a second attacker lamp 77L2, a third attacker lamp 77L3, a fourth attacker lamp 77L4, a fifth attacker lamp 77L5, a sixth attacker lamp 77L6, a seventh attacker lamp 77L7, an eighth attacker lamp 77L8, and a ninth attacker lamp 77L9.

<Attacker lamp illumination>
In this embodiment, a plurality of different presentation modes are provided as the mode of the attacker lamp light emission presentation. As shown in Fig. 9-26 (2), for example, there are the following presentation modes: an attacker lamp light emission presentation in which the attacker lamp emits white light (white light emission), an attacker lamp light emission presentation in which the attacker lamp emits orange light (orange light emission), an attacker lamp light emission presentation in which the attacker lamp emits pink light (pink light emission), an attacker lamp light emission presentation in which the attacker lamp emits red light (red light emission), and an attacker lamp light emission presentation in which the attacker lamp emits rainbow light (rainbow light emission).

[Attacker lamp lighting effect execution timing]
In this embodiment, the attacker lamp light-up effect can be executed when the game ball enters the big prize hole during the big prize round period (the game period of the big prize round game) in the big prize game state. In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a count switch 23 for detecting the game ball that has entered, and when the count switch 23 detects the passage of the game ball, the attacker lamp effect is executed.

In this embodiment, a jackpot round winning number counter is set as a counting means for using the number of winnings in the jackpot round winning port that is in an open state during jackpot round play as a condition for ending the open state. Specifically, the initial count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "10", and the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is counted down. In this embodiment, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light-up presentation is changed depending on the count value of this jackpot round winning number counter.

<Example of attacker lamp lighting effect>
Figures 9-27 to 9-30 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light-emitting presentation is changed depending on the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state.

As shown in FIG. 9-27(1), when a jackpot round play starts and the initial count value of the jackpot round winning ball counter is set to "10", upon detecting the entry of the first game ball into the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up presentation (hereinafter referred to as "first attacker lamp light-up presentation") that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to light up in orange.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27(2), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "9" and the entry of a second game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "second attacker lamp light-up presentation") that causes the second attacker lamp 77L2 to light up in orange while the first attacker lamp light-up presentation has been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27(3), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "8" and the entry of a third game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "third attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to light up in orange while the first attacker lamp light-up effect and the second attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-27(3), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "8" and the entry of a third game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "third attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the third attacker lamp 77L3 to light up in orange while the first attacker lamp light-up effect and the second attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (4), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "7" and the fourth game ball has been detected entering the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to light up in pink while the first attacker lamp light-up effect through the third attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (5), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6" and the entry of the fifth game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "fifth attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 to light up in pink while the first attacker lamp light-up effect through the fourth attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-28 (6), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "5" and the sixth game ball has been detected entering the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "sixth attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the sixth attacker lamp 77L6 to light up in pink, while the first attacker lamp light-up effect through the fifth attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (7), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "4" and the entry of the seventh game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "seventh attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the seventh attacker lamp 77L7 to light up in red while the first attacker lamp light-up effect through the sixth attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (8), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "3" and the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "2" based on the detection of the entry of the eighth game ball into the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "eighth attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the eighth attacker lamp 77L8 to light up in red while the first attacker lamp light-up effect through the seventh attacker lamp light-up effect have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-29 (9), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "2" and the ninth game ball has entered the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up effect (hereinafter referred to as the "ninth attacker lamp light-up effect") that causes the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to light up in red after executing the first to eighth attacker lamp light-up effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-30 (10), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "1" and the entry of the tenth game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an attacker lamp light-up presentation (hereinafter referred to as the "tenth attacker lamp light-up presentation") that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 through the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to light up in rainbow colors.

In this embodiment, during the jackpot round, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (attacker lamp light-up performance) using the attacker lamp to notify that a game ball has entered the large prize opening, while restricting the execution of a performance on the screen of the image display device 5 that notifies that a game ball has entered the large prize opening. A performance on the screen of the image display device 5 that notifies that a game ball has entered the large prize opening is, for example, a performance that displays the number of prize balls, or a performance that displays the characters "+15" corresponding to the number of prize balls on the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the jackpot round performance (round number display performance, music video performance, etc.) other than the performance that displays the number of prize balls is executed on the screen of the image display device 5.

<Light-up hold consecutive performance>
In this embodiment, the reserved consecutive performance can be executed, and the reserved consecutive performance that notifies the occurrence of consecutive jackpots using the attacker lamp is called "light-emitting reserved consecutive performance" (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "attacker lamp reserved consecutive performance"). The light-emitting reserved consecutive performance is a performance that notifies the occurrence of consecutive jackpots by making the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 emit light in rainbow colors when the entry of the fifth game ball into the big prize hole is detected in the sixth jackpot round game when controlled in the jackpot game state.

<Example of continuous light-emitting effect>
FIG. 9-31 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the continuous light-emitting pending presentation is executed during the jackpot round period in the jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the light-emitting hold consecutive performance in the performance determination process during a jackpot (not shown). In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute the light-emitting hold consecutive performance in the performance determination process during a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 9-31 (1), in the sixth round of the jackpot round game, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "7" and the fourth game ball is detected entering the jackpot winning hole, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a fourth attacker lamp light-up presentation in which the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 is illuminated pink, while the first attacker lamp light-up presentation through the third attacker lamp light-up presentation have been executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-31 (2), in the sixth round of the jackpot round game, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6" and the fifth game ball is detected entering the big prize opening, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a continuous light-up hold presentation in which the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is illuminated in rainbow colors while the first attacker lamp light-up presentation through the fourth attacker lamp light-up presentation have been executed.

[Over-winning performance]
In this embodiment, the large prize opening is controlled to an open state, and when the number of game balls entering the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) (10 game balls entering the large prize opening are detected), the large prize opening is controlled to a closed state in a round game, but it is also possible to detect the entry of game balls into the large prize opening in excess of the predetermined number (hereinafter, also referred to as an over-entry), and is configured to pay out prize balls even when an over-entry is detected. For example, if two over-entries occur between the entry of the tenth game ball into the large prize opening and the closing of the opening, 15 x (10 + 2) = 180 prize balls will be awarded in one round game.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an over-winning performance when an over-winning is detected. The over-winning performance is a performance that notifies the occurrence of an over-winning by making the rainbow-colored attacker lamp emit a special light (e.g., a strong light).

<Example of over-winning performance>
FIG. 9-32 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when an over winning presentation is executed during a jackpot round period in a jackpot gaming state.

In this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute an over-winning effect in the jackpot performance determination process (not shown). In this example, it is assumed that it has been decided to execute an over-winning effect in the jackpot performance determination process.

As shown in FIG. 9-32(1), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "1" and the entry of the tenth game ball into the jackpot winning hole is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a tenth attacker lamp light-up presentation that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 through the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to light up in rainbow colors.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-32 (2), when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "0", and an 11th game ball is detected to have entered the jackpot opening, the presentation control CPU 120 executes an over winning presentation in which the first attacker lamp 77L1 through the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 emit strong rainbow light.

[V award announcement]
In this embodiment, when the operating port of the V-judgment winning device 87 is open due to a small win game state, a game ball falls from the operating port into the V-judgment winning device 87, enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected, and a V-winning occurs, and a big win via a small win occurs. When a V-winning occurs, a V-winning notification effect is performed to notify the occurrence of the V-winning. This V-winning notification effect includes an image V-winning notification effect that notifies the occurrence of the V-winning on the screen of the image display device 5, and an attacker lamp V-winning notification effect that notifies the occurrence of the V-winning using the attacker lamp of the attacker panel 77.

In this embodiment, a small win winning number counter is set as a counting means for using the number of winning balls in the operating port that is in an open state during a small win game as a condition for ending the open state. Specifically, the initial count value of the small win winning number counter is set to "10", and the count value of the small win winning number counter is counted down.

In this embodiment, when a small win game starts, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit white light. After that (for example, 0.5 seconds after the start of the small win game), the presentation control CPU 120 turns off the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9. Next, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light-up presentation is changed depending on the count value of the small win winning number counter for the small win game. The presentation mode of the attacker lamp light-up presentation in the small win game is the same as the <Presentation example of the attacker lamp light-up presentation> shown in Figures 9-27 to 9-30, so a description is omitted.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 can execute an attacker lamp V winning notification performance when a V winning is detected. The attacker lamp V winning notification performance is a performance that notifies the occurrence of a V winning by making the attacker lamp, which is lit according to the count of the small winning number counter when a V winning occurs, emit a special light (for example, a strong light)

<Example of Attacker Lamp V Winning Notification>
Figure 9-33 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation mode of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the attacker lamp V winning notification presentation is executed during the small win play period in the small win play state.

First, as shown in FIG. 9-33(1), when the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 to emit white light.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (2), 0.5 seconds after the CPU 103 starts the small win game state, the presentation control CPU 120 turns off the first attacker lamp 77L1 through the ninth attacker lamp 77L9.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (3), when the count value of the small win winning number counter is set to "10" and the entry of the first game ball into the operating port is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a first attacker lamp light-up presentation that causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to light up in orange.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-33 (4), when the operating port of the V-judging winning device 87 is open during a small win game, the game ball enters the V-winning area 870 and is detected by the V-winning switch 87a during a specified valid period. At that time, the performance control CPU 120 executes the attacker lamp V-winning notification performance and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit a strong orange light.

[Restoration notification]
In this embodiment, when the power is restored from a power outage, a restoration notification effect can be executed in which a restoration display is displayed to notify that the power has been restored from the power outage. The restoration display is an image including the text "power restoration in progress" that is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the recovery display is an image with a higher display priority than various effect images (background images, decorative patterns, effect images related to jackpot round play, etc.). Therefore, to the player, it appears as if the recovery display is displayed first, followed by various effect images. However, in this example, since the display area of the recovery display is the entire screen of the image display device 5, it is difficult to see the various effect images (see Figure 9-34 (2)). Here, "high display priority" means, for example, that the display layer is higher and appears to be displayed in front.

[Controlling the appearance of the attacker lamp when power is restored]
In this embodiment, when power is restored after a power outage, an image is displayed to notify that the power has been restored, and the recovery display has a higher display priority than various other presentation images.When power is restored after a power outage that occurred during a jackpot round, it is possible to cause the attacker lamp to emit light in the same manner as when the power outage occurred.

<Example of attacker lamp control when power is restored>
FIG. 9-34 is an explanatory diagram showing the presentation of the attacker lamp on the attacker panel 77 when a power outage occurs during a jackpot round period in a jackpot gaming state and the power is restored.

In these figures, for the sake of convenience in explaining the performance examples, an attacker panel 77L equipped with an attacker lamp is shown to the right of the image display device 5. The actual positional relationship of each device (image display device 5, attacker panel 77L) in this embodiment is as shown in Figure 9-34. The same applies to Figures 9-35 and 9-36.

In this example, we will explain the situation in which a power outage occurs during the first jackpot round when three game balls have entered the jackpot slot.

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (1), during the jackpot round period of the first round in the jackpot game state, when the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "8" and the entry of a third game ball into the big prize opening is detected, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a third attacker lamp light-up presentation in which the third attacker lamp 77L3 is illuminated in orange while the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the second attacker lamp 77L2 are illuminated in orange.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a jackpot round performance and displays a jackpot round image on the screen of the image display device 5. This jackpot round image includes an image including a round display corresponding to the jackpot round number in the upper left corner of the screen (in this example, the letters "1 Round"), a prize ball number display showing the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot game in the lower right corner of the screen (in this example, "00495 pt"), a song selection prompt display in the lower left corner of the screen (in this example, an icon resembling a cross key) and a selected song display (in this example, an image resembling a musical note and the letters "Song A"), and a music video (in this example, the video (A) MV) that fills the entire screen.

As shown in Figure 9-34 (2), in the state of Figure 9-34 (1), a power outage occurs and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 stops, and as shown in Figure 9-34 (3), the power is turned on and the power supply resumes.

As shown in FIG. 9-34 (4), after the power supply is resumed, the CPU 103 controls the game state to the jackpot game state, which is the game state at the time of the power outage, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes a restoration notification presentation and displays a restoration display FV (in this example, an image including the words "power restoration in progress") on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, based on the fact that the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "7", the performance control CPU 120 executes a third attacker lamp light-up performance in which the third attacker lamp 77L3 lights up orange while the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the second attacker lamp 77L2 are illuminated orange.

Then, before recovery from the power outage is completed (while the recovery display FV (in this example, an image containing the words "power being restored") is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5), when a new (in this example, the fourth) game ball is detected to have entered the jackpot opening and the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter is set to "6", the presentation control CPU 120 executes a fourth attacker lamp light-up presentation in which the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the third attacker lamp 77L3 are illuminated orange and the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 is illuminated pink (not shown).

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp was illuminated when the recovery display was displayed after the power was restored from a power outage during a jackpot game state, but this is not limited to the above. In the event that an irregular situation occurs other than a power outage during a jackpot game state, the attacker lamp may be illuminated when an image informing of this irregular situation is displayed.

For example, if a magnetic error occurs during a jackpot game state, a magnetic error display is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that a magnetic error has occurred. This magnetic error display is the image with the highest display priority. Therefore, to the player, it appears that only the magnetic error display is being displayed. When this magnetic error display is displayed, if a jackpot round is being played, a specified attacker lamp may be illuminated.

In addition, if a gaming machine frame opening error occurs during a jackpot game state, an opening error display is displayed on the image display device 5 to notify the player that a gaming machine frame opening error has occurred. This opening error display is the image with the highest display priority. Therefore, to the player, it appears as if only the opening error display is being displayed. When this opening error display is displayed, if a jackpot round is being played, a specified attacker lamp may be illuminated.

[Control of attacker lamp effects related to chance-up effects]
In this embodiment, as shown in the first embodiment, it is possible to execute a chance-up effect in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach. In this embodiment, when the chance-up effect is executed, it is possible to execute a chance-up related light-emitting effect that indicates (reports) the number of times the chance-up effect has been executed and the effect mode using an attacker lamp.

In this embodiment, when any of the chance up effects, i.e., the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, the third chance up effect in the chance mode, or the fourth chance up effect in the blue belt mode, is executed, a chance up related light emitting effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as "chance up related light emitting effect (low expectation mode)") that causes the attacker lamp to light up in white can be executed.

In addition, when either the third chance up effect in the super hot mode or the fourth chance up effect in the red band mode is executed among the chance up effects, a chance up related light emission effect (hereinafter appropriately referred to as the "chance up related light emission effect (high expectation mode)") can be executed, which causes the attacker lamp to light up in red.

As shown in Figures 9-19 (1) to (4), the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, the third chance up effect in the chance mode, and the fourth chance up effect in the blue band mode are chance up effects with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the third chance up effect in the hot mode and the fourth chance up effect in the red band mode. Therefore, among the chance up effects, the chance up related light emitting effect when any of the first chance up effect, the second chance up effect, the third chance up effect in the chance mode, or the fourth chance up effect in the blue band mode is executed is called the chance up related light emitting effect (low expectation mode), and among the chance up effects, the chance up related light emitting effect when any of the third chance up effect in the hot mode or the fourth chance up effect in the red band mode is executed is called the chance up related light emitting effect (high expectation mode).

In this embodiment, when a chance up effect is executed in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, a chance up related light emission effect is executed using the attacker lamps. If a chance up effect is executed multiple times in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, the chance up related light emission effect is executed using the first attacker lamp 77L1 → second attacker lamp 77L2 → third attacker lamp 77L3 → fourth attacker lamp 77L4 (hereinafter, this arrangement of the attacker lamps is referred to as "attacker lamps in ascending numerical order") in the order in which the chance up effects were executed. Note that when chance up effects with the same execution timing are executed, the attacker lamps in descending numerical order are assigned in the order of the first chance up effect, the third chance up effect, and the fourth chance up effect, and the chance up related light emission effect is executed using those attacker lamps.

For example, the performance control CPU 120 may, in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach,
(A) When the first chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (low expectation mode) is executed in which the first attacker lamp 77L1 is illuminated in white,
(B) When the third chance-up effect of the super hot mode is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (high expectation mode) is executed in which the second attacker lamp 77L2 is illuminated in red,
(C) When the fourth chance-up effect of the red band mode is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (high expectation mode) is executed in which the third attacker lamp 77L3 is illuminated in red.
(D) When the second chance-up effect is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (low expectation mode) is executed in which the fourth attacker lamp 77L4 is illuminated in white.

<Example of attacker lamp control related to chance up effects>
9-35 and 9-36 are explanatory diagrams showing the presentation of the attacker lamp provided on the attacker panel 77 when the chance-up presentation is executed.

In this example, we will explain the cases in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach where (A) the chance up effect is not executed, (B1) only the first chance up effect is executed, (B2) only the second chance up effect is executed, (B3) only the third chance up effect in the chance mode is executed, and (B4) only the third chance up effect in the super hot mode is executed.

(A) When the chance-up effect is not executed: As shown in Figure 9-35 (1), when the second part of the latter half of the SP reach starts, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute any chance-up effect and displays the sixth battle image on the image display device 5.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the attacker lamp based on the fact that no chance-up performances are being executed.

(B1) When only the first chance up performance is executed As shown in Figure 9-35 (B1), at the timing when the second part of the second half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the first chance up performance and displays the effect added to the fist of ally CA1 in the sixth battle image in a special manner.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light-emitting performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the first chance-up performance is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light.

(B2) When only the second chance up performance is executed As shown in Figure 9-35 (B2), at the timing when the eighth battle image of the second part of the second half of the SP reach should be displayed, the performance control CPU 120 executes the second chance up performance and removes the effect from the fist of enemy CA2 in the eighth battle image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light-emitting performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the second chance-up performance is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light.

(B3) When only the third chance up performance of the chance mode is executed As shown in Figure 9-36 (B3), at the timing when the second part of the latter half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the third chance up performance of the chance mode, and adds a preview caption of the chance mode (the letters "CHANCE") to the lower left and upper right areas of the screen in the sixth battle image.

At this time, the performance control CPU 120 executes a chance-up related light-emitting performance (low expectation mode) based on the fact that the third chance-up performance of the chance mode is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit white light.

(B4) When only the third chance up performance of the super hot mode is executed As shown in Figure 9-36 (B4), at the timing when the second part of the latter half of the SP reach starts, the performance control CPU 120 executes the third chance up performance of the super hot mode, and adds a preview caption of the super hot mode (the words "Super hot") to the lower left and upper right areas of the screen in the sixth battle image.

At this time, the CPU 120 for controlling the presentation executes a chance-up related light-emitting presentation (high expectation mode) based on the fact that the third chance-up presentation of the super hot mode is being executed, and causes the first attacker lamp 77L1 to emit a red light.

[Third embodiment]
In the first embodiment, an example was shown in which a normal button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed from the third display switching effect to the fifth display switching effect of the super reach (FIG. 9-8: T18 to T29, FIG. 9-12 and FIG. 9-13 (19) to (30)). In the third embodiment, multiple types of effects related to the operation unit are executed during a predetermined period of the super reach.

In this embodiment, when notifying whether the display result of the Super Reach is a "jackpot" or not, a button effect related to the operation unit (push button 31B) can be executed. This button effect is composed of an effect that notifies the player that an effect to prompt the player to operate the operation unit will be executed, and an effect to prompt the player to operate the operation unit. In addition, as the button effect, multiple types of effect types are provided, including a first button effect and a second button effect.

[First button effect]
In this embodiment, from the third display switching performance to the fifth display switching performance of the super reach, a first button performance associated with the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed.

The first button effect is composed of an effect (first operation notice display) that notifies the player that an effect to prompt the player to operate the operation unit will be executed when notifying whether the display result is a "jackpot" or not, and an effect (first operation prompt display) that prompts the player to operate the operation unit (see Figures 9-39 and 9-40). Hereinafter, the first operation notice display and the first operation prompt display are referred to as "images related to push button 31B".

In the first button presentation, (1-1) a spiral effect (hereafter referred to as the "swirl effect") is superimposed on each of the repeatedly displayed sixth through ninth battle images, and a first operation advance notice display, which is an image that resembles push button 31B, is gradually formed (emphasized) from the fourth display switch presentation (2 second cycle) to the fifth display switch presentation (1 second cycle). After that, (1-2) a first operation promotion display for encouraging the player to operate the operation unit and a first operation promotion effect display are displayed.

In this embodiment, while the first operation notice display is displayed, operation of the push button 31B is not valid, and while the first operation prompt display is displayed, operation of the push button 31B is valid.

Note that, during the period when the first operation notice display is displayed and the operation of the push button 31B is not valid, if a special operation different from a normal operation (such as pulling the stick controller 31A toward you for three seconds) is performed, the same performance control as when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted may be performed.

When the first button press effect begins, a swirl effect is superimposed on each of the sixth through ninth battle images during the third display switching effect, reducing the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space.

Next, in the fourth display switching performance, a swirl effect is continuously superimposed on each of the sixth through ninth battle images, and the first operation preview display of the first aspect is displayed in the center of the swirl. The first operation preview display of the first aspect is displayed in a manner that is thinner and less visible than the first operation preview display of the second aspect described below.

Next, in the fifth display switching performance, a swirl effect continues to be superimposed on each of the sixth through ninth battle images, and the display mode of the first operation notice display displayed in the center of the swirl changes from the first mode to the second mode. The first operation notice display in the second mode is displayed in a darker and more visible mode than the first operation notice display in the first mode.

In this way, an effect is executed in which the first operation preview display of the second aspect is formed in stages via the first operation preview display of the first aspect, thereby notifying the execution of some effect using the operation unit (push button 31B). In addition, for each of the sixth to ninth battle images, an operation preview display is displayed together with a spiral effect, suggesting that the outcome of the battle will be announced by operating the operation unit (push button 31B) indicated by the first operation preview display.

(1-2) When the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach ends, the game moves to the third part of the latter half. At this point, a first operation prompting display is displayed in the center of the screen, urging the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B). Here, because the first operation prompting effect display is displayed in the background of the first operation prompting display, the player operates the operation unit in the hope that ally CA1 will win by operating the operation unit.

In the first button presentation, the first operation notice display and the first operation prompt display are displayed at an angle (hereinafter referred to as the "basic angle") from which the push button 31B is overlooked with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (gaming board). In other words, the first operation notice display and the first operation prompt display are displayed without changing the angle from which the push button 31B is overlooked from the basic angle.

[Second button effect]
In this embodiment, from the second display switching performance to the fifth display switching performance of the super reach, a second button performance associated with the operation unit (push button 31B in this example) is executed.

The second button effect is composed of an effect (second operation notice display) that notifies the player that an effect to prompt the player to operate the operation unit will be executed when the display result indicates a "jackpot", and an effect (second operation prompt display) that prompts the player to operate the operation unit (see Figures 9-41 and 9-42). Hereinafter, the second operation notice display and the second operation prompt display are referred to as "images related to push button 31B".

In the second button performance, (2-1) a blackout image that reduces the visibility of each of the sixth to ninth battle images is displayed, followed by (2-2) a special background image including a golden flame that similarly reduces the visibility of each of the sixth to ninth battle images, a second operation preview display that is an image that resembles a push button 31B that expands while rotating/falling in stages from the top of this special background image, ally CA1, and second ally CA3. Then, (2-3) a special background image including a golden flame that similarly reduces the visibility of each of the sixth to ninth battle images, a second operation prompting display to encourage the player to operate the operation unit, ally CA1, and second ally CA3 are displayed.

In this embodiment, while the second operation notice display is displayed, operation of the push button 31B is not valid, and while the second operation prompt display is displayed, operation of the push button 31B is valid.

Note that, during the period when the second operation notice display is displayed and the operation of the push button 31B is not valid, if a special operation different from a normal operation (such as pulling the stick controller 31A toward you for three seconds) is performed, the same performance control as when the operation of the push button 31B is accepted may be performed.

(2-1) When the second button press effect starts (the moment the second display switching effect starts), a blackout image is superimposed on the image, reducing the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space.

(2-2)
(2-2a) Next, the blackout image is erased, and a special background image including a golden flame as a background image and the second operation notice display of the first aspect are displayed. The second operation notice display of the first aspect is displayed smaller and with lower visibility than the second operation notice display of the second aspect and the second operation notice display of the third aspect described later.

The second operation notice display in the first aspect is displayed with the angle at which the push button 31B is viewed from above being changed. In this example, the push button 31B is displayed at an angle at which the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as the "first angle").

At this time, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 are displayed near the second operation advance display of the first aspect (for example, the left and right parts of the second operation advance display). The size (dimension) of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation advance display, and is smaller than the size of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 when the second operation prompting display of the second aspect and the second operation prompting display of the third aspect, which will be described later, are displayed.

(2-2b) Next, the special background image including the golden flame continues to be displayed as the background image, the second operation notice display of the first aspect is erased, and the second operation notice display of the second aspect is displayed. The second operation notice display of the second aspect is displayed in a manner that is larger and has higher visibility than the second operation notice display of the first aspect, and smaller and has lower visibility than the second operation notice display of the third aspect.

The second operation notice display in the second aspect is displayed with the angle at which the push button 31B is viewed from above being changed. In this example, the display is at an angle different from the first angle, where the push button 31B is viewed from above the upper right (hereinafter referred to as the "second angle" as appropriate).

At this time, ally character CA1 (hereinafter referred to as "ally CA1") is displayed in the second operation notice display of the second aspect. In this example, a part of ally CA1 (ally CA1's face) is included as an image displayed in the second operation notice display of the second aspect.

Also, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 are continuously displayed near the second operation advance display of the second aspect (for example, the left and right parts of the second operation advance display). The size (dimension) of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation advance display, is larger than the size of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 when the second operation prompting display of the first aspect is displayed, and is smaller than the size of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 when the second operation prompting display of the third aspect described below is displayed.

(2-2c) Next, the special background image including the golden flame continues to be displayed as the background image, the second operation notice display of the second aspect is erased, and the second operation notice display of the third aspect is displayed. The second operation notice display of the third aspect is displayed in a manner that is larger and more highly visible than the second operation notice display of the first aspect and the second operation notice display of the second aspect.

The second operation notice display in the third aspect is displayed with the angle of view of the push button 31B changed. In this example, the push button 31B is displayed at an angle of view of the push button 31B viewed from a position rotated approximately 90 degrees to the lower left around an axis perpendicular to the gaming machine (gaming board) with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (gaming board) (hereinafter referred to as the "third angle" as appropriate). The third angle is an angle different from the first angle and the second angle.

At this time, the second ally character CA3 (hereinafter referred to as "second ally CA3") is displayed in the second operation notice display of the third aspect. In this example, a part of the second ally CA3 (the face of second ally CA3) is included as an image displayed in the second operation notice display of the third aspect.

Also, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 continue to be displayed near the second operation notice display of the third aspect (for example, the left and right parts of the second operation notice display). The size (dimension) of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 at this time corresponds to the size of the second operation notice display, and is larger than the size of ally CA1 and second ally CA3 when the second operation prompting display of the first aspect or the second operation notice display of the second aspect is displayed.

(2-3) When the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach ends, it moves to the third part of the latter half. Here, a special background image including a golden flame continues to be displayed as the background image, and a second operation prompting display is displayed in the center of the screen to prompt the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B). At this time, the second operation prompting display is displayed in a golden light-emitting manner and as if it is performing an operation in the up and down directions. In addition, the second operation prompting display is displayed at an angle (hereinafter referred to as the "fourth angle") when the player's viewpoint is directly facing the gaming machine (gaming board) and looking down on the push button 31B.

In this example, the fourth angle is the same as the basic angle. However, this is not limited to this, and the fourth angle may be an angle different from the basic angle. For example, the fourth angle may be the same as the first angle, the same as the second angle, the same as the third angle, or an angle different from the basic angle or any of the first to third angles.

Here, the second operation prompting display shows ally CA1 and second ally CA3 along with a special background image including a golden flame, so the player operates the operation part in the hope that ally CA1 will win by operating the operation part.

In addition, when the game moves to the third part of the second half of the SP reach and a second operation prompting display is displayed in the center of the screen urging the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B), the operation unit (push button 31B) emits rainbow light. When the player operates the push button 31B, the push button 31B vibrates, notifying the player that ally CA1 has won. At this time, the operation unit (push button 31B) continues to emit rainbow light.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second operation notice display and the second operation prompt display are images of the push button 31B viewed from an angle where it is actually possible to see it (front, upper right, etc.), but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the second operation notice display and the second operation prompt display may be images of the push button 31B viewed from an angle where it is actually difficult to see it.

For example, the second operation notice display or the second operation promotion display may be an image of the push button 31B viewed from an angle that is difficult to actually see, such as an angle of looking down on the push button 31B from behind the gaming machine or an angle of looking down on the push button 31B from directly below the gaming machine.

[Processing for determining effects at the start of fluctuation]
9-37 is a flowchart showing the effect determination process executed at the start of fluctuation in this embodiment. The process of steps S03TM3010 to S03TM3050 is the same as step S03TM1010 to S03TM1050 of the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment, so the description will be omitted.

After processing step S3050, the performance control CPU 120 determines the type of button performance based on a table for determining the type of button performance (see Figure 9-38 (5)) (step S03TM3060), and then ends the processing.

[Tables referenced in the process of determining the performance at the start of fluctuation]
Figures 9-38 (1) to (5) are examples of tables to be referenced when determining whether or not to execute various effects and the performance mode in the performance determination process at the start of fluctuation in this embodiment. Figures 9-38 (1) to (4) are the same as the tables to be referenced when determining whether or not to execute various effects and the performance mode in the performance determination process at the start of fluctuation in the first embodiment shown in Figures 9-19 (1) to (4), so their explanations are omitted.

<Table for determining the type of button effect>
FIG. 9-38 (5) is an example of a button effect type determination table that is referenced when determining the button effect type in step S03TM3060 of the effect determination process at the start of fluctuation.

Figure 9-38 (5) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a button effect type determination table. As shown in Figure 9-38 (5), in this embodiment, a judgment value is assigned so that the selection ratio of the button effect type differs depending on whether the display result is a "miss" or a "jackpot."

If the display result is "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is "miss"), it is decided that the first button effect will be executed 100% as the type of button effect. In other words, if the display result is "miss", the second button effect will not be selected as the type of button effect.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), it is decided that the button effect type will be the first button effect 90% of the time, and the second button effect 10% of the time. In other words, when the display result is "jackpot", either the first button effect or the second button effect is selected as the button effect type.

As shown in FIG. 9-38 (5), when the second button effect is executed, the expectation of a jackpot is higher than when the first button effect is executed.

The second button effect is executed only when the display result is a "jackpot," so it is a type of jackpot confirmation effect.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second button performance was a jackpot confirmation performance, but this is not limited to the above, and the second button performance does not have to be a jackpot confirmation performance.

For example, if the display result is a "miss" (i.e., the display result specified by the display result specification command is a "miss"), it is determined that the button effect type will be the first button effect 99% of the time, and the second button effect 1% of the time.

When the display result is "jackpot" (i.e., when the display result specified by the display result specification command is "jackpot"), it is decided that the button effect type will be the first button effect 90% of the time, and the second button effect 10% of the time. In other words, when the display result is "jackpot", either the first button effect or the second button effect is selected as the button effect type.

[Example of the first button effect]
Fig. 9-40 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode when the first button performance is executed. In this example, the performance mode when the display switching performance of each number of times is started is shown. Fig. 9-39 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after the development of the SP reach when the first button performance is executed.

As shown in Figure 9-40 (1), in the third display switching performance, when the performance control CPU 120 starts the first button performance, it reduces the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space by superimposing a spiral effect UEF on each of the sixth to ninth battle images (Figure 9-39: T18).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (2), in the fourth display switching performance, the performance control CPU 120 continues to superimpose the swirl effect UEF on each of the sixth through ninth battle images, and displays the first mode of the first operation preview display BTX1 in the center of the swirl (FIG. 9-39: T22).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (3), in the fifth display switching performance, the performance control CPU 120 continues to superimpose the swirl effect UEF on each of the sixth through ninth battle images, and changes the display mode of the first operation preview display BTX2 displayed in the center of the swirl from the first mode to the second mode (FIG. 9-39: T26).

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-40 (4), when the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach ends, the third part of the latter half begins. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first operation prompting effect display in an area other than the center of the screen, and displays the first operation prompting display BTX in the center of the screen (FIG. 9-39: T30). At this time, the first operation prompting display BTX is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from above at the basic angle.

[Example of second button effect]
Fig. 9-42 is an explanatory diagram showing the performance mode when the second button performance is executed. Fig. 9-41 is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance after the SP reach development when the second button performance is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-42 (1), when the second display switching effect starts (FIG. 9-41: T14), the effect control CPU 120 starts the second button effect and superimposes a blackout image BO on the entire screen of the image display device 5, thereby reducing the visibility of each object placed in the virtual three-dimensional space.

In this way, in the middle of the second part of the latter half of the SP reach, the second button effect is started, and the visibility of the effect image related to the battle effect that was being displayed decreases, thereby interrupting the battle effect as an effect that is visible on the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (2), the performance control CPU 120 erases the blackout image BO and displays a special background image BI including a golden flame as the background image and the second operation notice display BTY1 of the first mode (FIG. 9-41: T12). At this time, the second operation notice display BTY1 of the first mode is displayed with the push button 31B viewed from above at a first angle and with the center of the second operation notice display BTY1 located at the top of the screen.

In this example, the special background image BI is an image including a golden flame and a black background. The golden flame of the special background image BI is displayed in approximately 80% of the entire area of the special background image BI, and the black background of the special background image BI is displayed in approximately 20% of the entire area of the special background image BI. This is not limited to the above form, and the display area of the special background image BI in which the golden flame is displayed may be any area greater than 50% of the entire special background image BI, and may be 51% or 100%.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (3), the performance control CPU 120 changes the second operation notice display BTY2 from the first state to the second state (FIG. 9-41: T15). At this time, the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second state is displayed in a state in which the push button 31B is viewed from above at the second angle, and the center of the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second state is lower than the center position of the second operation notice display BTY1 of the first state and is located in the center of the screen. The performance control CPU 120 also displays an image including a part of ally CA1 (in this example, ally CA1's face) in the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second state.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a part of ally CA1 is displayed in both the valid operation area and the non-valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second aspect, but this is not limited to the above. A part of ally CA1 may be displayed in either the valid operation area or the non-valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second aspect. For example, a part of ally CA1 is displayed in the valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second aspect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 9-42 (4), the performance control CPU 120 changes the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third mode from the second mode (FIG. 9-41: T21). At this time, the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third mode is displayed in a state in which the push button 31B is viewed from above at a third angle, and the center of the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third mode is lower than the center position of the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second mode and is located in the center of the screen. In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays an image including a part of the second ally CA3 (in this example, the face of the second ally CA3) in the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third mode.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a portion of the second ally CA3 was displayed in both the valid operation area and the non-valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third aspect, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and a portion of the second ally CA3 may be displayed in either the valid operation area or the non-valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third aspect. For example, a portion of the second ally CA3 is displayed in the valid operation area of the second operation notice display BTY3 of the third aspect.

Next, as shown in Figures 9-42 (5) and (6), when the second part of the latter half of the SP Reach ends and the game moves to the third part of the latter half, the performance control CPU 120 continues to display the special background image BI as the background image, and displays the second operation prompting display BTY at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, which prompts the player to operate the operation unit (push button 31B) (Figure 9-41: T30). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays ally CA1 and second ally CA3 along with the special background image BI in the background of the second operation prompting display BTY.

At this time, the second operation prompting display is displayed in a gold light-emitting manner and in a manner in which an operation is being performed in the up and down directions. In FIG. 9-42 (5), the second operation prompting display BTY is displayed in a manner in which an operation is being performed in the down direction, and in FIG. 9-42 (6), the second operation prompting display BTY is displayed in a manner in which an operation is being performed in the up direction.

Next, when the player operates the operation unit, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a victory presentation. In the victory presentation, ally CA1 is displayed large in the center of the screen, the movable body is moved from the retreated position (first position) to the advanced position (second position), and a common combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "333") is stopped in the lower area of the screen (not shown).

In this way, the player operates the operation unit, the second button effect ends, and an effect image related to the battle effect (here, an effect image related to the victory effect) is displayed, thereby resuming the battle effect as an effect visible on the image display device 5.

In this way, the first button effect does not notify the player whether the display result will be a "jackpot" or not until the battle effect branches off after the start of the first button effect in the middle of the SP reach battle effect. On the other hand, the second button effect is a jackpot guaranteed effect, so the player can be notified that the display result of the variable display will be a "jackpot" when the second button effect in the middle of the SP reach battle effect starts. This makes the second button effect feel more special, and increases the excitement of the super reach.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second button performance was a performance using the image display device 5, but this is not limited to this form, and the second button performance may be a performance using the image display device 5 as well as a performance device different from the image display device 5.

For example, the second button performance is performed by displaying the second operation preview display of the first aspect, the second operation preview display of the second aspect, the second operation preview display of the third aspect, and the second operation promotion display using the image display device 5, and by playing and outputting sound effects using the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this case, the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation preview display of the first aspect is displayed is called "sound effect A", the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation preview display of the second aspect is displayed is called "sound effect B", the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation preview display of the third aspect is displayed is called "sound effect C", and the sound effect that is played and output when the second operation prompting display is displayed is called "sound effect D".

The pitch (key) of these sound effects may be set according to the pitch relationship of sound effect A < sound effect B < sound effect C < sound effect D, and the volume may be set according to the loudness relationship of sound effect A < sound effect B < sound effect C < sound effect D.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a combination of the ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" was displayed as a victory effect, but the invention is not limited to this form, and other effects may be executed as victory effects.

For example, if a configuration is adopted in which a light guide plate is provided at the very front of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a winning effect may be displayed in which a combination of ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot," and a light guide plate illumination effect may be executed in which the light guide plate emits rainbow colors.

In addition, as a winning effect, a combination of the ally character CA1 and a decorative pattern indicating that the display result is a "jackpot" may be displayed, and a pseudo light guide plate light emission effect may be executed in which an image simulating a light guide plate light emission effect (an image (video) simulating the appearance of a light guide plate emitting light) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

[Display color of the staged image]
FIG. 9-43 is an explanatory diagram showing the wavelengths (nm) of the colors of the images displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "display colors").

As shown in FIG. 9-43, the display colors in this embodiment are as follows:
・Purple: 380-430 (nm)
・Indigo: 430-460 (nm)
・Blue: 460-500 (nm)
Green: 500-570 (nm)
・Yellow: 570-590 (nm)
・Orange: 590-610 (nm)
・Red: 610-780 (nm)
The wavelength range is set.

＜Golden colors＞
In this embodiment, the display color of the preview caption in the super hot third chance up performance and the display color of the flame included in the special background image in the second button performance are both set to gold.

In this embodiment, it is possible to set a specific display color as a similar color to gold. A similar color to gold is a display color that is the same as or close to gold, and is a type of display color that can be associated with gold by the player. In this example, a similar color to gold includes gold and display colors in the wavelength ranges shown below.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-43, the gold-like colors in this embodiment are set in the wavelength range of 550 to 600 (nm).
The display colors corresponding to this wavelength range are:
Yellow-green: 550-570 (nm)
・Yellow: 570-590 (nm)
Golden yellow: 590 to 60 (nm)
It is as follows.

Therefore, when effect images with display colors of yellow-green, yellow, and golden yellow are displayed, these effect images will be displayed in similar colors of gold.

In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the gold color of the preview caption in the third chance up performance of the super hot mode is related to the gold color of the flame included in the special background image in the second button performance, but this is not limited to this form, and a configuration in which other display colors are related may also be adopted.

For example, a configuration related to the color red may be adopted, and when the display color of the special background image in the second button performance contains the highest proportion of colors similar to red, the display color of the dialogue caption for the fourth chance up in the red band mode: red, and the display color of the flame (red, orange, yellow, etc.) of the special background image in the second button performance: a color similar to red, are related.

(Effect 1)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of executing a battle presentation suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state on the image display device 5. In the battle presentation, it is possible to position the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2 in positions facing each other in the virtual three-dimensional space, and it is possible to suggest (notify) that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state by a victory presentation in which the ally CA1 wins against the enemy CA2, and it is possible to suggest that the game will not be controlled to a jackpot game state by a defeat presentation in which the ally CA1 is defeated by the enemy CA2.

In the second part of the latter half of the battle performance, the sixth battle image (e.g., FIG. 9-11 (11)) is an image of ally CA1 seen from the front (inner first viewpoint (IE1)), and the eighth battle image (e.g., FIG. 9-11 (13)) is an image of enemy CA2 seen from the front (inner third viewpoint (IE3)). Neither ally CA1 nor enemy CA2 are displayed, and the eighth battle image can be displayed after the sixth battle image is displayed but before the eighth battle image is displayed. The seventh battle image (e.g., FIG. 9-11 (12)), which is an image of the tree BG1 seen from the front (inner second viewpoint (IE2)), and the ninth battle image (e.g., FIG. 9-11 (14)), which is an image of the building BG2 seen from the front (inner fourth viewpoint (IE4)), can be displayed after the eighth battle image is displayed and before the sixth battle image is displayed again, in which neither the ally CA1 nor the enemy CA2 characters are displayed. Then, after the sixth through ninth battle images are displayed in sequence, a victory or defeat effect is executed (FIG. 9-14).

According to this configuration, first, the sixth battle image (Fig. 9-11 (11), etc.) is displayed, which allows the player to grasp the detailed aspects of the ally CA1's facial expression, the added effects, etc., and then the eighth battle image (Fig. 9-11 (13), etc.) is displayed, which allows the player to grasp the detailed aspects of the enemy CA2's facial expression, the added effects, etc. Here, by sandwiching the seventh battle image (tree BG1) when transitioning from the sixth battle image (ally CA1) to the eighth battle image (enemy CA2), and by sandwiching the ninth battle image (building BG2) when transitioning from the eighth battle image (enemy CA2) to the sixth battle image (ally CA1), the player can feel that the viewpoint is being continuously switched in a predetermined virtual three-dimensional space in which each object is located. In addition, by switching the position of the virtual screen based on the inside viewpoint (IE), the player can feel a sense of realism as if he or she were between the ally CA1 and the enemy CA2. In this way, it is possible to provide players with powerful images that utilize the virtual three-dimensional space, greatly increasing the interest of the battle effects.

(Effect 2)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 is capable of simultaneously displaying ally CA1 and enemy CA2 in the first half of the SP reach (FIG. 9-9) and the first part of the latter half (FIG. 9-10), and is capable of making the player aware that a battle between ally CA1 and enemy CA2 will take place before the transition to the inside viewpoint (IE). Then, after the switching from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image is executed based on the inside viewpoint (IE), a victory presentation or defeat presentation is executed, thereby making it possible to notify the result of the battle (suggesting the occurrence of a jackpot) while increasing attention to the battle.

(Effect 3)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the display period is set relatively long for the sixth and eighth battle images in which characters are displayed, and the speed at which they are switched to the next battle image (seventh battle image, ninth battle image) (presentation progression speed) is slow. On the other hand, the display period is set relatively short for the seventh and ninth battle images in which characters are not displayed, and the speed at which they are switched to the next image (eighth battle image, sixth battle image) (presentation progression speed) is fast.

With this configuration, when characters are displayed, the presentation progresses at a relatively slow speed, making it easier for the player to clearly observe the character's facial expressions and the added effects, and when characters are not displayed, the presentation progresses at a relatively fast speed, making the appearance of the character more memorable when the screen switches to one that displays the character, and emphasizing that the battle is between alternating characters.

(Effect 4)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can repeatedly switch the display from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image multiple times, and the display switching period can be gradually shortened to 10 seconds, 9 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second (Figure 9-8).

With this configuration, even if the display switching control from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image is repeated multiple times, the display switching period of the display switching control executed later is shortened, creating a sense of speed in the screen changes and preventing the display switching control from feeling monotonous.

(Effect 5)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 can display an operation prompting display BT1 for prompting the operation of the operating means (push button 31B) on the image display device 5 (FIG. 9-14 (31)). Here, the display switching from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image is repeated five times (each with a period of 10 seconds, 9 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second), and then the operation prompting display BT1 is displayed on the image display device 5, and a formation presentation is executed in which the operation prompting display BT1 is formed in stages from the third display switching (period of 5 seconds) to the fifth display switching (period of 1 second).

In the formation performance, the appearance of a swirl effect UEF suggests that an operation prompting display BT1 will be formed (first stage: Fig. 9-12 (19) to (22)), then the first type of operation preview display BTA1 is displayed (second stage: Fig. 9-12 (23) to (26)), then the second type of operation preview display BTA2 is displayed (third stage: Fig. 9-13 (27) to (30)), and finally the operation prompting display BT1 is completed (final stage: Fig. 9-14 (31)).

With this configuration, the operation prompting display BT1 is gradually formed in response to the cycle of the display switching control from the sixth battle image to the ninth battle image becoming shorter, so that the player's interest in the operation prompting display BT1 can be heightened as the sense of speed of the screen changes increases, and interest can be efficiently increased by the formation presentation that is executed in parallel with the display switching control that is executed multiple times.

(Effect 6)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 is configured to display the ally CA1 and enemy CA2 in the background when the final display switching control is executed and the completed operation prompting display BT1 is displayed. Here, the ally CA1 is displayed in the upper left area of the screen, the enemy CA2 is displayed in the lower right area of the screen, and the operation prompting display BT1 is displayed in the center area of the screen, so that each can be clearly seen by the player.

With this configuration, the display area of the image display device 5 can be effectively used to display the operation prompting display BT1 between ally CA1 and enemy CA2, suggesting that the battle between ally CA1 and enemy CA2 will be decided by operating the operation unit, further enhancing the excitement of the battle between the characters.

(Effect 7)
In the gaming machine shown in the above embodiment, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a whiteout presentation when transitioning from the first part of the latter half of the SP reach to the second part of the latter half (Figure 9-8: T9, Figure 9-10 (10)).

With this configuration, by executing a whiteout effect while the first part of the second half based on the outer viewpoint is being executed, the player's attention can be temporarily diverted from the objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. Then, by transitioning to the second part of the second half based on the inner viewpoint, the player's attention can be directed back to the objects placed in the virtual three-dimensional space. This reduces the sense of discomfort caused by the change from an outer viewpoint to an inner viewpoint, and provides multiple opportunities to focus on the battle effects.

(Effect 8)
As shown in Fig. 9-16, when the effect image of the third chance up effect in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position to the advance position. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-23 and Fig. 9-24, during the jackpot round period, a replay image including the effect image of the third chance up effect in the second part of the latter half of the SP (announcement caption of the super hot mode) is displayed. At this time, when the replay image including the effect image of the third chance up effect in the second part of the latter half of the SP is displayed, the movable body YM is not moved from the retreat position to the advance position.

According to this configuration, after it is notified that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state in the SP reach, when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, a replay image including the performance image of the second half of the SP reach in which the third chance up performance (a notice caption of a super hot mode) is executed is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby satisfying the needs of the player who wants to see again the performance image of the second half of the SP reach in which the third chance up performance is executed when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state, and by restricting the movement of the movable body YM from the retreated position to the advanced position when the performance image of the third chance up performance is displayed in the replay image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the image display device 5 and to increase the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 9)
As shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-24, a music video production image of either "Video (A),""Video(B)," or "Video (C)," a replay image of either "Capter 1,""Capter2," or "Capter 3," and a replay preview display of the replay preview effect (the words "Next Round Battle Replay") are displayed.

With this configuration, by displaying the replay footage of "Capter 1," "Capter 2," or "Capter 3" when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state even when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state other than the SP reach, it is possible to satisfy the needs of the player who wants to see the replay footage of "Capter 1," "Capter 2," or "Capter 3" when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state again, and it is possible to increase the variety of presentations when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the machine is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(Effect 10)
As shown in FIG. 9-22, in the case of a "3R jackpot", the replay effect is not executed in the jackpot round game. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-23 and FIG. 9-24, in the case of a "10R jackpot", the replay effect is executed in the jackpot round game.

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is a "10R jackpot," a replay image is displayed as the image of the jackpot game state, making the "10R jackpot" feel more special than a "3R jackpot" and also drawing the player's attention to the type of jackpot, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 11)
Although not shown in the figure, when a third chance up effect of a super hot mode is being executed in a variable display SP reach (battle effect) that was executed immediately before control was exercised to the jackpot game state, the display of the effect image (preview caption) related to the third chance up effect may be restricted in the replay image of the replay effect.

With this configuration, by restricting the display of effect images related to chance-up effects in the replay image, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not to display effect images related to chance-up effects for the replay image, thereby reducing the processing burden on effect control.

(Effect 12)
As shown in FIG. 9-23 and FIG. 9-24, when the Chapter selected as the replay video reaches its end, the same video as the replay video of the Chapter that was displayed immediately before is displayed again from the beginning.

With this configuration, when the display of the replay video ends before the jackpot game state is reached, the replay video is displayed from the beginning. If an irregular situation occurs while the game is in the jackpot game state (for example, the player forgets to hit to the right, or the game ball gets stuck and cannot be shot toward the jackpot opening), the replay video on the screen of the image display device 5 can be smoothly presented, preventing confusion for the player.

(Effect 13)
As shown in FIG. 9-23(2), during the replay video selection period, a replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, and a replay video selection prompt display BT1 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5. Then, the player can operate the push button 31B to select/determine any chapter ("Capter 1", "Capter 2", "Capter 3") corresponding to the replay video icon as the replay video.

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, the player can select at least one of "Capter 1," "Capter 2," or "Capter 3" as the replay video, which prevents the time period for displaying the replay video in the jackpot game state from running out. Also, since the player can select any replay video, the replay video can be displayed more effectively, which increases the excitement of playing in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 14)
As shown in Figures 9-23 and 9-24, when the player selects/determines "Capter 2" as the replay image by operating push button 31B during the replay image selection period, a replay image including the performance image of the second part of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed during the jackpot round period.

With this configuration, by displaying replay footage including at least the performance footage of the second half of the SP reach on the image display device 5, it is possible to satisfy the needs of the player who wants to see the performance footage of the second half of the SP reach again when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, and it is also possible to display the replay footage more effectively, thereby increasing the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 15)
As shown in Figures 9-24 (10B) to (12B), if there is pending information that will become a "hit" in the future among the pending information stored at the time of the occurrence of a jackpot, an image pending consecutive performance (the letters "V GET" on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5) is executed after the end of the jackpot game state to notify that the next "hit" will occur consecutively within the range of the pending information stored at the time of the occurrence of the jackpot.

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, the display result of the variable display for which the start condition has not been met is suggested to be a "jackpot" or "minor jackpot," providing a sense of surprise to the player, allowing the replay video to be displayed more effectively, and increasing the interest of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 16)
As shown in Figures 9-27 to 9-30, during a jackpot round game, an attacker lamp light-up effect is executed in which one of the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9 is illuminated based on the detection of a game ball entering a jackpot opening.

The attacker lamp light-up effect is different depending on the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter. When the first to third game balls have been won into the big prize opening, an attacker lamp light-up effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (first attacker lamp 77L1 to third attacker lamp 77L3) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in orange. When the fourth to sixth game balls have been won into the big prize opening, an attacker lamp light-up effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to sixth attacker lamp 77L6) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in pink. When the seventh to ninth game balls have been won into the big prize opening, an attacker lamp light-up effect is executed in which the attacker lamps (seventh attacker lamp 77L7 to ninth attacker lamp 77L9) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in red.

When a game ball is detected entering a big prize opening during a big prize round, a music video effect or a round number display effect is executed on the screen of the image display device 5, while the execution of effects such as a prize ball number display effect that notifies the player that a game ball has entered a big prize opening is restricted.

With this configuration, by restricting the use of the image display device 5 to indicate the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, and by using the attacker lamp to indicate the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of each performance of the jackpot round performance being executed on the image display device 5, and to increase the interest in the game during the jackpot game state.

(Effect 17)
As shown in Figures 9-27 to 9-30, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light-emitting presentation is varied according to the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter. Based on the detection of the entry of the first to third game balls into the large prize opening, an attacker lamp light-emitting presentation is executed in which the attacker lamps (first attacker lamp 77L1 to third attacker lamp 77L3) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in orange. Based on the detection of the entry of the fourth to sixth game balls into the large prize opening, an attacker lamp light-emitting presentation is executed in which the attacker lamps (fourth attacker lamp 77L4 to sixth attacker lamp 77L6) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in pink. Based on the detection of the entry of the seventh to ninth game balls into the large prize opening, an attacker lamp light-emitting presentation is executed in which the attacker lamps (seventh attacker lamp 77L7 to ninth attacker lamp 77L9) corresponding to the number of winnings are newly illuminated in red.

With this configuration, when the machine is in a jackpot game state, the attacker lamp can be illuminated differently depending on the number of winning balls that have entered the jackpot opening, drawing attention to the attacker lamp and increasing the excitement of the game in the jackpot game state.

(Effect 18)
As shown in Figure 9-31, if there is pending information that will become a "hit" in the future among the pending information stored when a jackpot occurs, an illuminated pending consecutive display is executed after the jackpot game state ends to notify that the next "hit" will occur consecutively within the range of the pending information stored at the time of the jackpot occurrence (an display in which the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is illuminated in rainbow colors when the entry of the fifth game ball into the big prize opening is detected during the sixth jackpot round game).

With this configuration, in addition to the number of game balls that have entered the big prize slot, the attacker lamp can also indicate that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition has not been met is either a "big prize" or a "small prize," providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing the interest of the game in the big prize state.

(Effect 19)
As shown in Figure 9-32, when an over-winning is detected, an over-winning effect is executed to notify the occurrence of an over-winning by making the rainbow-colored attacker lamp emit a special light (e.g., a strong light).

With this configuration, the attacker lamp can not only notify the player of the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, but also let the player know that more than a predetermined number (10 balls) of game balls have entered the large prize opening, increasing the player's interest in the game during a large prize game state.

(Effect 20)
As shown in Figure 9-33, when a V winning is detected during small win play, an attacker lamp V winning notification effect is executed in which the attacker lamp, which emits light in accordance with the count of the small win winning number counter, emits a special light (e.g., a strong light) to notify the occurrence of a V winning.

With this configuration, the attacker lamp can not only notify the player of the number of winning balls that have entered the large prize opening, but also make the player aware that the game ball has passed through the V prize area 870, and prevent a situation in which the game ball has not passed through the V prize area 870, preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

(Effect 21)
As shown in Fig. 9-34, when a power outage occurs during a jackpot game state and the power is restored thereafter, a restoration display FV (an image including the text "power restoration in progress") having a higher display priority than the presentation image related to the jackpot round presentation is displayed on the image display device 5. When this restoration display FV is displayed on the image display device 5, the attacker lamp is illuminated with different presentation modes of the attacker lamp illumination presentation depending on the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter.

With this configuration, if a power outage occurs during a jackpot game state and the power is subsequently restored, while the image display device 5 is displaying the recovery display FV, the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening is indicated by the illumination mode of the attacker lamp, thereby accurately informing the player that the current game state is being controlled to a jackpot game state, and preventing the player from being put at a disadvantage.

(Effect 22)
As shown in Figures 9-35 and 9-36, when a chance-up effect with a low expectation level (for example, the third chance-up effect in the chance mode) is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (low expectation level) is executed which causes the attacker lamp to light up in white, and when a chance-up effect with a high expectation level (for example, the third chance-up effect in the super hot mode) is executed, a chance-up related light-emitting effect (high expectation level) is executed which causes the attacker lamp to light up in red.

With this configuration, the attacker lamp indicates the number of times the chance-up effect has been executed and the type of chance-up effect that has been executed, allowing the player to easily check whether there is a high probability that the SP reach will be controlled to a jackpot state, thereby increasing the interest of the SP reach.

(Effect 23)
As shown in Fig. 9-40, in the first button presentation, a first operation prompting display BTX is displayed, which displays the push button 31B at a basic angle from above with the player's viewpoint facing the gaming machine (game board). When the first operation prompting display BTX is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, a second operation notice display BTY1 of a first aspect in which the push button 31B is displayed at a first angle viewed from the upper right, a second operation notice display BTY2 of a second aspect in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right which is different from the first angle, and a second operation prompt display BTY which is an image displayed at a fourth angle and different from the first operation prompt display BTX are displayed. Then, when the second operation prompt display BTY is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

According to this configuration, in the first button performance, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the second button performance, the first operation prompt display BTX is an image that displays the push button 31B from a single angle, while in the second button performance, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the first button performance, the second operation notice display and the second operation prompt display are images that display the push button 31B from a plurality of angles, making the second button performance feel more special than the first button performance and increasing interest in the SP reach in which the button performance is executed.

(Effect 24)
As shown in Fig. 9-16, in the SP reach, the third chance up performance is executed and the notice telop is displayed. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-19 (3), the expectation of the big win is different because the notice telop of white color is smaller than the notice telop of gold color.

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button presentation, a first operation prompting display BTX is displayed, which displays the push button 31B at a basic angle overlooking the player's viewpoint with the player facing directly toward the gaming machine (gaming board). Then, when the first operation prompting display BTX is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, a second operation advance notice display BTY1 of a first aspect in which the push button 31B is displayed at a first angle viewed from the upper right, and a second operation prompting display BTY, which is an image displayed at a fourth angle and is different from the first operation prompting display BTX, are displayed. Then, when the second operation prompting display BTY is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

When the second button performance is executed, a special background image BI is displayed as the background image. This special background image is composed of multiple colors (gold, black), including the same golden color as the gold preview caption. The proportion of each color among these multiple colors is as follows in the special background image: gold: approximately 80%, black: approximately 20%, and the proportion of the same golden color as the gold preview caption is the highest among these multiple colors.

With this configuration, when the second button effect is executed, the background image contains the highest proportion of the same golden color as the golden preview caption among multiple colors that at least include the same golden color as the golden preview caption, which suggests that the probability of a jackpot is high. This makes the second button effect feel more special than the first button effect, and also allows the player to easily recognize that there is a high probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, allowing them to anticipate favorable developments following the button effect.

(Effect 25)
As described above, in this characteristic portion, the push button 31B is composed of an effective operation portion capable of receiving a player's operation and an ineffective operation portion not capable of receiving a player's operation. The effective operation portion is a portion of the push button 31B that includes the word "PUSH" and can be pushed downward (operated), and the ineffective operation portion is a base portion provided below the effective operation portion and cannot be pushed in (operated).

As shown in Figures 9-9 to 9-14, an SP reach is being executed using ally character CA1 to indicate whether the display result will be a "jackpot."

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button presentation, a first operation prompt display BTX is displayed, which displays the push button 31B at a basic angle overlooking the player's viewpoint with the player facing directly towards the gaming machine (gaming board). At this time, the ally character CA1 is not displayed in the first operation prompt display BTX. Then, when the first operation prompt display BTX is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the push button 31B being operated by the player.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, a second operation notice display BTY2 in a second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right, and a second operation prompt display BTY, which is an image displayed at a fourth angle and is different from the first operation prompt display BTX, are displayed. At this time, an ally character CA1 is displayed in an area corresponding to the effective operation portion of the second operation prompt display BTY. Then, when the second operation prompt display BTY is displayed, a presentation is executed to notify the display result based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player.

With this configuration, when the second button performance is executed, the ally character CA1 is displayed in the area corresponding to the operation effective portion of the second operation prompting display BTY, making the second button performance feel more special than the first button performance and increasing the interest of the SP reach in which the button performance is executed.

(Effect 26)
9-42, in the second button presentation, (1) a second operation notice display BTY1 of a first mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a first angle seen from the upper right, (2) a second operation notice display BTY2 of a second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle seen from the upper right, which is an angle different from the first angle, and (3) a second operation prompt display BTY which is an image displayed at a fourth angle and different from the first operation prompt display BTX, are displayed in this order. Then, when the second operation prompt display BTY is displayed, a presentation is executed in which the display result is notified based on the fact that the push button 31B has been operated by the player.

With this configuration, by gradually improving the visibility of the images related to the push button 31B (second operation notice display, second operation promotion display), it is possible to draw the player's attention to the images related to the push button 31B and to pique the player's interest in the next image related to the push button 31B that is displayed, thereby increasing the excitement of the SP reach in which the second button performance is executed.

(Effect 27)
As shown in Figure 9-42, before an image related to push button 31B is displayed, a blackout image BO is displayed on the image display device 5, which reduces the visibility of the SP reach performance image that was previously displayed.

With this configuration, before the image related to the push button 31B is displayed, a blackout image BO is displayed that reduces the visibility of the previously displayed performance image, thereby further emphasizing the image related to the push button 31B and increasing the interest of the SP reach in which the image related to the push button 31B is displayed.

(Effect 28)
Although not shown in the figure, in the second button performance, the second operation preview display of the first aspect, the second operation preview display of the second aspect, the second operation preview display of the third aspect, and the second operation promotion display are displayed using the image display device 5, and sound effects are played back and output using speakers 8L and 8R.

At this time, the sound effect played and output when the second operation preview display of the first aspect is displayed is referred to as "sound effect A", the sound effect played and output when the second operation preview display of the second aspect is displayed is referred to as "sound effect B", the sound effect played and output when the second operation preview display of the third aspect is displayed is referred to as "sound effect C", and the sound effect played and output when the second operation prompting display is displayed is referred to as "sound effect D". The pitches of these sound effects are set in the following pitch relationship: sound effect A < sound effect B < sound effect C < sound effect D.

With this configuration, by gradually increasing the pitch of the sound effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image related to the push button 31B and to pique his or her interest in the next image that is displayed, thereby increasing the excitement of the SP reach in which the second button performance is executed.

(Effect 29)
As shown in FIG. 9-9 to FIG. 9-14, an SP reach is executed using the ally character CA1, which indicates whether the display result will be a "jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 9-40, in the first button performance, when the first operation prompt display BTX is displayed, the ally character CA1 is not displayed, and the first operation prompt effect display is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button performance, when the second operation prompt display BTY is displayed, the ally character CA1 and the second ally character CA3 are displayed.

With this configuration, when the first operation prompt display BTX is displayed in the first button performance, the display of characters including at least the ally character CA1 is restricted, and when the second operation prompt display BTY is displayed in the second button performance, characters including at least the ally character CA1 are displayed, making the second button performance feel more special than the first button performance and increasing the interest of the SP reach in which the button performance is executed.

(Effect 30)
Although not shown, when a configuration is adopted in which a light guide plate is provided at the very front of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko game machine 1, a victory effect is displayed in which an ally character CA1 and a combination of decorative patterns indicating that the display result will be a "jackpot," and a light guide plate light-emitting effect can be executed in which the light guide plate emits rainbow colors.

In addition, as a victory effect, the ally character CA1 and a combination of decorative symbols indicating that the display result will be a "jackpot" are displayed, and a pseudo light guide plate light emission effect can be executed in which an effect image simulating a light guide plate light emission effect (an image (video) simulating the appearance of a light guide plate emitting light) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, a pseudo light guide plate light emission effect that imitates a light guide plate light emission effect without using a light guide plate can be performed without using a light guide plate, which is difficult to implement due to cost and space considerations, and the excitement when the machine is controlled to a jackpot game state can be increased to the same extent as with a gaming machine equipped with a light guide plate.

(Effect 31)
As shown in Figure 9-39, the first button effect starts at timing T18 and ends at timing T31, so the execution period of the first button effect is within the period from T1 to T33, which is the execution period of the SP reach.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-41, the second button effect starts at timing T14 and ends at timing T31, so the execution period of the second button effect is within the period from T1 to T33, which is the execution period of the SP reach.

With this configuration, the button effect is started and the SP reach is interrupted, giving the player a sense of surprise, and by resuming the SP reach after the button effect has ended, the player is made aware of the effects that had been performed up until that point, preventing the sudden start of a jackpot game state.

(Effect 32)
As shown in Figure 9-4, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the "super reach" variation pattern is executed than when the "normal reach" variation pattern is executed.

As shown in FIG. 9-37, in step S03TM3010 of the process for determining the effect at the start of fluctuation, if the fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern involving a super reach (i.e., if the fluctuation pattern is a "normal reach"), the process for determining the type of button effect in step S03TM3060 is skipped, and the button effect is not executed.

With this configuration, when a "normal reach" variation pattern, which has a lower chance of winning than a "super reach" variation pattern, is executed, the execution of the button effects is restricted, which prevents the effects from becoming drawn out when a "normal reach" variation pattern, which has a short execution period, is executed, and makes the execution of a "super reach" variation pattern stand out even more.

(Effect 33)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, (1) the second operation notice display BTY1 of the first mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a first angle viewed from the upper right, (2) the second operation notice display BTY2 of the second mode in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle different from the first angle in which the push button 31B is displayed at a second angle viewed from the upper right, and (3) the second operation promotion display BTY which is an image displayed at a fourth angle and different from the first operation promotion display BTX, are displayed in this order while switching angles from the top to the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5.

With this configuration, the image associated with the push button 31B moves, giving the second button effect a special feel, making the player aware that the second button effect is different from the first button effect in which the image associated with the push button 31B does not move, and creating a sense of anticipation for the display results of the variable display notified after the button effect.

(Effect 34)
As shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, the image related to push button 31B is a three-dimensional image imitating push button 31B, and the second operation preview display in which the operation of push button 31B is not valid is displayed in an appearance in which no operation is being performed and in an appearance in which it is not glowing in gold, while the second operation promotion display in which the operation of push button 31B is valid is displayed in an appearance in which an operation is being performed and in an appearance in which it is glowing in gold.

With this configuration, the image associated with the push button 31B is a three-dimensional image that imitates the push button 31B, which improves the presentation effect when the image associated with the push button 31B is displayed from a number of different angles, and when the operation of the push button 31B is valid, the image associated with the push button 31B is displayed as if it is performing an action and emitting gold light, making it clear to the player that the operation of the push button 31B is valid.

(Effect 35)
Although not shown in the figure, in an SP reach, when the first operation prompt display or the second operation prompt display is displayed, and a victory effect is executed based on the player operating push button 31B, the push button 31B vibrates and emits rainbow colors.

With this configuration, the push button 31B lights up, clearly indicating to the player that the operation of the push button 31B is valid, and the player's interest can be increased when the big win game state is reached by the operation of the push button 31B.

(Effect 36)
As shown in FIG. 9-39, the execution period of the first button effect is the period from T18 to T31, and as shown in FIG. 9-41, the execution period of the second button effect is the period from T14 to T31.

With this configuration, the second button effect can be executed for a longer period of time than the first button effect, further emphasizing the second button effect and increasing the excitement when the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

(Effect 37)
Although not shown in the figure, as the second operation notice display or the second operation promotion display, it is possible to display an image of the push button 31B viewed from an angle that is actually difficult to see, such as an image of the push button 31B viewed from the back of the gaming machine or an image of the push button 31B viewed from directly below the gaming machine.

With this configuration, by displaying images related to the push button 31B from multiple different angles, including angles at which it is difficult for the player to see the push button 31B, the second button effect can be made to feel more special than the first button effect, and interest in the SP reach in which the button effect is executed can be increased.

(Effect 38)
As shown in Figure 9-40, in the first button presentation, the first operation notice display before the first operation prompting display is displayed disables (is not enabled) the player from operating the push button 31B.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 9-42, in the second button presentation, the second operation notice display before the second operation prompt display is displayed disables (does not enable) the player's operation of the push button 31B.

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the operation of push button 31B from becoming effective before the first operation prompt display is displayed in the first button performance, thereby reducing the performance effect of the first button performance; similarly, it makes it possible to prevent the operation of push button 31B from becoming effective before the second operation prompt display is displayed in the second button performance, thereby reducing the performance effect of the second button performance.

(Effect 39)
As shown in Fig. 9-16, in the SP reach, the third chance up effect is executed and a notice telop is displayed. Also, as shown in Fig. 9-19 (3), the probability of winning is different because the white notice telop is smaller than the gold notice telop.

As shown in FIG. 9-42, when the second button performance is executed, a special background image BI is displayed as the background image. This special background image is composed of multiple colors (gold, black) including the same golden color as the golden preview caption. The proportion of each color among these multiple colors is as follows in the special background image: gold: approximately 80%, black: approximately 20%, and among these multiple colors, the proportion of the golden color similar to the golden preview caption is the highest.

With this configuration, when the second button effect is executed, the background image contains the highest proportion of the same golden color as the golden preview caption among multiple colors that at least include the same golden color as the golden preview caption, which suggests that the probability of a jackpot is high. This makes the second button effect feel more special than the first button effect, and also allows the player to easily recognize that there is a high probability that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, allowing them to anticipate favorable developments following the button effect.

[Other Modifications]
(1) In the above embodiment, an example in which the viewpoints are switched in the order of the first outer viewpoint (OE1), the second outer viewpoint (OE2), the third outer viewpoint (OE3), and the fourth outer viewpoint (OE4) has been described, but the switching order of the outer viewpoints can be determined arbitrarily. For example, the order may be OE1 → OE3 → OE2 → OE4, or the order may be OE2 → OE4 → OE1 → OE3. In addition, a plurality of viewpoint switching patterns may be provided as the viewpoint switching pattern of the outer viewpoint, and it may be determined which of the plurality of viewpoint switching patterns is used to switch the outer viewpoint based on the fluctuation pattern or the display result (jackpot, miss). In addition, there may be a viewpoint switching pattern that includes a specific viewpoint and a viewpoint switching pattern that does not include a specific viewpoint. For example, for viewpoint switching patterns with a low expectation of a jackpot, the proportion of specific viewpoints (e.g., OE2 and OE4) included may be low, and for viewpoint switching patterns with a high expectation of a jackpot, the proportion of specific viewpoints (e.g., OE2 and OE4) included may be high.

(2) In the above embodiment, an example in which the viewpoints are switched in the order of the first inner viewpoint (IE1), the second inner viewpoint (IE2), the third inner viewpoint (IE3), and the fourth inner viewpoint (IE4) has been described, but the switching order of the inner viewpoints can be determined arbitrarily. For example, the order may be IE1 → IE3 → IE2 → IE4, or IE2 → IE4 → IE1 → IE3. In addition, a plurality of viewpoint switching patterns may be provided as the viewpoint switching pattern of the inner viewpoint, and based on the fluctuation pattern or the display result (jackpot, miss), it may be determined which of the plurality of viewpoint switching patterns is used to switch the inner viewpoint. In addition, there may be a viewpoint switching pattern that includes a specific viewpoint and a viewpoint switching pattern that does not include a specific viewpoint. For example, viewpoint switching patterns with a low probability of winning may have a low probability of including a specific viewpoint (e.g., IE1 or IE3 facing the character directly), and viewpoint switching patterns with a high probability of winning may have a high probability of including a specific viewpoint (e.g., IE1 or IE3).

(3) In the above embodiment, an example was given in which the battle presentation is executed during the period in which the special symbols (decorative symbols) are displayed in a variable manner, and indicates whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this form. For example, the battle presentation may be executed during the period in which the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state, and indicate the number of rounds. For example, the battle presentation may be executed during the period from round 1 to round 5, and if ally CA1 wins, the rounds continue until round 10, and if enemy CA2 wins, the rounds end at round 5.

The battle effect may be an effect that is executed during the period when the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state and indicates the number of times the time will be shortened. For example, the battle effect may be an effect that is executed during a round, and if ally CA1 wins, the number of times the time will be shortened will be 7, and if enemy CA2 wins, the number of times the time will be shortened will be 1.

In addition, if the gaming machine is a high probability machine, the battle presentation may be executed during a round, and if ally CA1 wins, the state is controlled to the high probability state after the jackpot ends, and if enemy CA2 wins, the state is not controlled to the high probability state after the jackpot ends. In addition, the battle presentation may be executed during a variable display period that is executed in the high probability state, and if ally CA1 wins, the high probability state continues, and if enemy CA2 wins, the high probability state ends.

(4) In the above embodiment, the gaming machine is equipped with (i) a [Type 1 jackpot] that controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "jackpot", and (ii) a [Type 2 jackpot] that controls to a small jackpot gaming state based on the display result of the variable display becoming a "small jackpot" to allow the gaming medium to enter the V winning area in the V winning device, and controls to a jackpot gaming state based on the gaming medium entering the V winning area. That is, the gaming machine in the above embodiment is an example of a [Type 1 + Type 2 mixed machine] that has the patterns of [Type 1 jackpot] and [Type 2 jackpot] as the pattern for controlling to a jackpot gaming state (i + ii), but is not limited to this form, and various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to gaming machines with different playability.

(4-1) For example, the effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-ST machine]. A [V-ST machine] is a gaming machine having gameplay characteristics in which a gaming ball enters a variable V winning ball device (V lid) (described later) in the first round of a jackpot game state, and then enters a V winning hole, whereby a variable probability control (described later) is executed over a maximum of 70 variable displays after the end of the jackpot game.

The game states are a "normal state" which is a low probability state and a non-time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is not executed (game state)" as appropriate), and a "probability variable state" which is a high probability state and a time-saving state (hereinafter referred to as "probability variable control is executed (game state)" as appropriate). In a [V-ST machine], the probability variable state continues until one of the following ending conditions is met first: a predetermined number of special games (e.g., 70 times) have been played, or the next jackpot game state has begun.

In addition, there will be two types of jackpots: a "normal jackpot" where the special jackpot control is not executed, and a "special jackpot" where the special jackpot control is executed.

The large prize opening is also provided with a variable V ball entry device (V lid). The mechanism of the variable V ball entry device is the same as that of the V-determining prize device 87, so a description is omitted. The open state of the variable V ball entry device (V lid) can be a short open state (e.g., 0.1 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a short period of time, and a long open state (e.g., 15 seconds) in which the open state lasts for a long period of time. In a "normal jackpot," the variable V ball entry device is in a short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and in a "variable jackpot," the variable V ball entry device is in a long open state in the first round of the jackpot game state.

The jackpot game state resulting from a "normal jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the jackpot opening to an opening state that is advantageous to the player in the first to third rounds. In addition, in a "normal jackpot", the variable V winning ball device is in a short opening state in the first round, making it extremely difficult to get the game ball to enter the V winning opening, and it is not expected that the special bonus control will be executed, so this is essentially a "normal jackpot". For example, there are two types of "normal jackpot", a "3R normal jackpot" with three rounds, and a "10R normal jackpot" with ten rounds.

The jackpot game state due to a "probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot that changes the large prize entry port to an opening state advantageous to the player in the first to third/tenth rounds. In addition, in a "probable jackpot", the variable V prize ball device is in a long opening state in the first round, making it extremely easy to get the game ball to enter the V prize port, and it is expected that probable control will be executed, making it a virtual probable jackpot. For example, there are "probable jackpots" with three rounds, a "3R probable jackpot", and a "10R probable jackpot" with ten rounds.

In such a V-ST gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiments may be applied.

For example, in a [V-ST machine] gaming machine, an attacker lamp light-up effect may be executed when the first game ball enters the big prize slot during each jackpot round period in the jackpot game state. In this case, the attacker lamp that is illuminated by the attacker lamp light-up effect indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot round game currently being played. For example, when the first attacker lamp 77L1 is newly illuminated, it is suggested that the first jackpot round game of the jackpot round game is being played, and when the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 is newly illuminated, it is suggested that the fifth jackpot round game of the jackpot round game is being played.

Then, when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state, the game ball is detected as having entered the V winning area, and if a V winning occurs, a V winning notification effect is performed to notify the user that a V winning has occurred. This V winning notification effect includes an image V winning notification effect that notifies the user that a V winning has occurred on the screen of the image display device 5, and an attacker lamp V winning notification effect that notifies the user that a V winning has occurred using the attacker lamp of the attacker panel 77.

For example, in a jackpot round game of a "probable jackpot," the variable V winning ball device goes into a long open state in the first round, and when the game ball enters and is detected in the V winning area and a V winning occurs, an attacker lamp V winning notification effect can be executed to notify the player that a V winning has occurred. The presentation form of the attacker lamp V winning notification effect is the same as the presentation form shown in Figure 9-33, so a description thereof will be omitted.

(4-2) The effects shown in the above embodiment may also be applied to a gaming machine having the gameplay characteristics of a [V-variable probability machine]. A [V-variable probability machine] has a normal state, which is a low probability state, and a variable probability state, which is a high probability state (a gaming state in which variable probability control is executed). As jackpot types, a "normal jackpot" in which variable probability control is not executed, and a "variable probability jackpot" in which variable probability control is executed, are provided. A [V-variable probability machine] is a gaming machine having gameplay characteristics in which variable probability control is executed over the period from the end of a jackpot game until the occurrence of the next jackpot by a game ball entering the aforementioned variable V winning ball device (V lid) in the first round of the jackpot game state, and then entering the V winning port.

In such a [V-variable machine] gaming machine, the various effects shown in the above embodiment may be applied.

(5) In the above embodiment, the period during which music can be selected is set to the entire jackpot round period, but this is not limited to the above. The period during which music can be selected may be set to a predetermined period of the jackpot round period.

For example, the period during which music can be selected may be set to the period from the first round to the third round during the jackpot round, and the period during which music cannot be selected may be set to the period from the fourth round to the tenth round during the jackpot round.

(6) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which, when the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot", a replay preview effect is executed to notify the player that a replay effect will be executed before the replay effect of the jackpot round game is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this form. When the jackpot type is a "10R jackpot", a replay preview effect may be executed to notify the player that a replay effect will be executed/is being executed/has been executed at a timing different from the timing before the replay effect of the jackpot round game is executed.

For example, the replay preview effect is executed at the timings (A) to (D) shown below.
(A) The timing when the replay effect starts. (B) The timing after the replay effect starts but before it ends. (C) The timing when the replay effect ends. (D) The timing after the replay effect ends.

Of the above-mentioned (A) to (D), the following describes (B).
A replay notice may be executed to inform the player that a replay effect is being executed at a timing when 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the replay effect of the big win round game. The replay notice display at this time may include an explanatory image (for example, an image in which a predetermined character gives an explanation about the effect being executed in the replay image) corresponding to the replay image of the currently executed replay effect.

(7) In the above embodiment, when a replay effect is being performed, the image display device 5 is used to display the replay video, and only the selected music is played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R. However, this is not limited to the above embodiment, and when a replay effect is being performed, the image display device 5 may be used to display the replay video, and the selected music and audio different from the music may be played and output from the speakers 8L, 8R.

For example, when a replay performance is being performed, the replay video may be displayed using the image display device 5, and a selected song may be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R, while the SP reach performance sound (sound effects, character voices, etc.) of the replay video may be played and output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

(8) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the execution of a performance using a movable body YM that reduces the visibility of the image display device 5 was restricted when a replay performance was being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this form. It is also possible to restrict the execution of a performance using a device other than the movable body YM that reduces the visibility of the image display device 5 when a replay performance is being executed.

For example, if a light guide plate is provided at the forefront of the screen of the image display device 5 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and a configuration is adopted in which a red light guide plate light emission effect in which the light guide plate emits red light can be executed when an effect is added to the fist of ally character CA1 as a first chance up effect, when the first chance up effect is executed in the replay image, the effect image in which an effect is added to the fist of ally character CA1 in the first chance up effect is displayed using the image display device 5, but the execution of the red light guide plate light emission effect of the first chance up effect using the light guide plate is restricted.

(9) In the above embodiment, during the period when the replay effect is being executed, a winning ball count display effect, which notifies the player that a gaming ball has entered the large winning slot, may be executed, or execution may be restricted.

(10) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamps light up in orange (1-3 balls), pink (4-6 balls), red (7-9 balls), or rainbow (10 balls) depending on the number of game balls that enter the large prize opening. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the attacker lamps may light up in a different manner to the above example depending on the number of game balls that enter the large prize opening.

For example, multiple display colors including similar colors (orange, pink, red) are used to light up depending on the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening, but this is not limited to the above, and multiple display colors that do not include similar colors (orange, pink, red) may also be used to light up depending on the number of winning game balls in the large prize opening.

For example, depending on the number of game balls that enter the large prize slot, (1-3 balls) an attacker lamp light-up effect may be executed in which the attacker lamps light up orange, (4-6 balls) an attacker lamp light-up effect in which the attacker lamps light up blue, (7-9 balls) an attacker lamp light-up effect in which the attacker lamps light up purple, and (10 balls) an attacker lamp light-up effect in which the attacker lamps light up white.

(11) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp was illuminated in a predetermined display color when the gaming ball entered the large prize opening, but this is not limited to this form, and other illumination control may be performed.

For example, when a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, the attacker lamp may be illuminated in a predetermined display color while gradually increasing the brightness from 0% to 100%. Also, when a gaming ball enters the large prize opening, the attacker lamp may be illuminated in a predetermined display color while gradually expanding the light-emitting area from the lower left to the upper right. By combining these techniques, it is possible to make the attacker lamps appear to emit light in a flowing pattern from the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9.

(12) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which an image related to the push button 31B was displayed as the second operation preview display in the second button performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In the second button performance, an image related to a device (performance device) different from the push button 31B may be displayed as the second operation preview display.

For example, in the second button presentation, the second operation preview display may display an image related to the gaming machine frame, an image related to the gaming lamp, an image related to the entire gaming machine, an image related to the image display device 5, etc.

(13) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a portion of the SP reach was displayed as the replay image, but this is not limited to the above, and the entire SP reach may be displayed as the replay image.

(14) In the above embodiment, the size of the attacker lamps on the attacker panel is the same for all of the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9, but this is not limited to the above, and all of the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 do not have to be the same size.

For example, the size may be set based on the size relationship of the first attacker lamp 77L1 < second attacker lamp 77L2 < ... < eighth attacker lamp 77L8 < ninth attacker lamp 77L9, or the size may be set based on the size relationship of the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 < eighth attacker lamp 77L8 < ... < second attacker lamp 77L2 < first attacker lamp 77L1.

(15) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the period of the display switching performance becomes shorter with each successive number of times, but this is not limited to the above, and the period of the display switching performance does not have to become shorter with each successive number of times.

For example, the cycle of the display switching performance is set to one of the patterns (A) to (C) shown below.
(A) The cycle of the display switching performance gets longer each time. (B) The cycle of the display switching performance is the same for all times. (C) Depending on the number of times, the cycle of the display switching performance gets shorter or longer than the cycle of the previous display switching performance.

(16) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which various characters (ally CA1, second ally CA3) were displayed near the image (second operation notice display, second operation promotion display) associated with the push button 31B when the second button performance was executed, but this is not limited to the above, and various characters may or may not be displayed near the image associated with the push button 31B when the second button performance is executed.

For example, the second button performance is executed in the patterns (A) to (D) shown below.
(A) Second operation notice display: Various characters are displayed,
Second operation prompt display: Various characters are displayed. (B) Second operation notice display: Various characters are not displayed.
Second operation prompt display: Various characters are displayed. (C) Second operation notice display: Various characters are displayed.
Second operation promotion display: No display of various characters (B) Second operation notice display: No display of various characters,
Second operation prompt: No characters displayed

(17) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the reserved consecutive performance could be performed in a "10R jackpot", but the invention is not limited to this form, and the reserved consecutive performance may also be performed in jackpots other than a "10R jackpot".

For example, the reserved consecutive performance may be executed in a "3R jackpot". In this case, the reserved consecutive performance is executed when the third jackpot round play is being executed.

(18) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which a replay effect could be executed in a "10R jackpot", but this is not limited to this, and a replay effect may also be executed in a jackpot other than a "10R jackpot".

For example, a replay effect may be executed in a "3R jackpot." In this case, during the jackpot fanfare period, a replay preview effect is executed along with a replay video selection effect, and the replay effect is executed from the first jackpot round play, and the replay video is displayed.

(19) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which neither ally CA1 nor enemy CA2 is displayed in the seventh battle image based on the second inner viewpoint or the ninth battle image based on the fourth inner viewpoint, but this is not limited to the above, and at least one of ally CA1 or enemy CA2 may be displayed in the seventh battle image based on the second inner viewpoint or the ninth battle image based on the fourth inner viewpoint.

For example, in the seventh battle image, a portion (left part) of ally CA1 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a portion (right part) of enemy CA2 is displayed on the left side of the screen. Also, in the ninth battle image, a portion (left part) of enemy CA2 is displayed on the right side of the screen, and a portion (right part) of ally CA1 is displayed on the left side of the screen.

With this configuration, in the series of effects in which the sixth to ninth battle images are displayed, switching from the sixth battle image to the seventh battle image to the eighth battle image to the ninth battle image can be done seamlessly, increasing the interest of the SP reach.

(20) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp light-up effect can be executed when the game ball enters the large prize opening during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and an effect other than the attacker lamp light-up effect can be executed when the game ball enters the large prize opening during the jackpot round period in the jackpot game state.

For example, during a jackpot round in a jackpot game state, when the game ball enters the jackpot hole, an attacker lamp illumination effect may be executed, and a winning sound effect may be executed in which a winning sound effect is played and output from speakers 8L and 8R.

The type of winning sound effect may be different depending on the number of winning balls in the large prize opening. For example, if the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 1 to 3, winning sound effect A may be played and output, if the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 4 to 6, winning sound effect B may be played and output, if the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 7 to 9, winning sound effect C may be played and output, and if the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 10, winning sound effect D may be played and output.

The manner (volume, pitch) of the winning sound effect may be varied depending on the number of winning balls in the large prize opening. For example, the volume of the winning sound effect may be increased or the pitch (key) of the winning sound effect may be increased in the following relationship: when the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 1-3 < when the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 4-6 < when the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 7-9 < when the number of winning balls in the large prize opening is 10.

In addition, the sound volume of the winning sound effect may be kept constant and not varied depending on the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, while the pitch (key) of the winning sound effect may be varied depending on the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, or the sound volume of the winning sound effect may be kept constant and not varied depending on the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening, while the sound volume of the winning sound effect may be varied depending on the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening.

(21) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the attacker lamp lighting effect was executed based on the detection of a game ball entering the big prize hole during a jackpot round game, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the attacker lamp lighting effect may be executed based on the detection of a game ball entering in a game state other than the jackpot round game.

For example, in a pachinko game machine 1 having the gameplay characteristics of a "small win rush machine" in which the small win game state is a first KT state in which it is difficult for a game ball to enter a special winning port in a small win game and prize balls are unlikely to be awarded, and a second KT state in which it is easy for a game ball to enter a special winning port in a small win game and prize balls are likely to be awarded (hereinafter referred to as the "small win rush state" as appropriate), an attacker lamp illumination effect may be executed based on the detection of a game ball entering a special winning port during the small win rush state.

(22) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the execution of both the first button effect and the second button effect was restricted in a variation pattern accompanied by a normal reach, but the present invention is not limited to this form. In a variation pattern accompanied by a normal reach, the execution of at least one of the first button effect and the second button effect may be restricted.

For example, in a variation pattern involving a normal reach, the execution of the second button effect may be restricted, while the first button effect may be allowed to be executed.

(23) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second button effect can be executed when notifying whether the display result is a "jackpot" or not. However, the present invention is not limited to this form, and the second button effect can also be executed when notifying that the reel will be controlled to time-saving state B or time-saving state C.

For example, when the game reaches Yu-time, the second button effect is executed. Then, when the second operation prompt display is displayed and the player operates the push button 31B, an icon containing the words "Enter Yu-time!!" is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 to notify the player that Yu-time has been reached.

(24) In the above embodiment, when a replay effect is being executed, the volume of the music in the music effect (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "music volume") is played and output at a louder volume than the volume of the sound effects associated with the replay video (hereinafter, appropriately referred to as "replay volume"). However, this is not limited to the above, and when a replay effect is being executed, the volume of the music in the music effect does not have to be played and output at a louder volume than the volume of the sound effects associated with the replay video.

For example, the relationship between the music volume and the replay volume may be set in one of the following patterns (A) to (D).
(A) Music volume > Replay volume (B) Music volume = Replay volume (C) Music volume < Replay volume

For example, the output volume, which is the volume of the sound played back and output from speakers 8L and 8R, is determined based on the "basic volume" and "channel setting ratio" contained in the sound data. The output volume is a numerical value obtained by multiplying the "basic volume" and the "channel setting ratio."

The channel setting percentage, which is the volume value assigned to each channel, can be set for each channel from maximum volume "1", which is 100% of the reference output volume, to full mute "0", which is 0%.

In the case of (A), the channel setting ratio for the music volume may be set to "1 (100%)", while muting processing may be executed for the replay volume. In the muting processing, processing is executed to set the channel setting ratio for the effect sound being played back to "0 (0%)", thereby setting the output volume of the effect sound being played back to "0". Note that while the output volume is "0" when muting is executed, the effect sound itself is being played back.

In addition, in the case of (A), the channel setting ratio for the music volume may be set to "1 (100%)", while muting is performed for the replay volume, but at a specific timing (e.g., the timing when a chance-up effect is executed in the replay video), the channel setting ratio for the replay volume may be set to "1 (100%)".

(25) In the above embodiment, in the second button performance, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 displayed together with the image related to the push button 31B (second operation notice display, second operation promotion display) are displayed at an angle that is the same as the basic angle of a bird's-eye view of the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint facing directly to the gaming machine (gaming board) (see FIG. 9-42). However, this is not limited to the above embodiment, and in the second button performance, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 displayed together with the image related to the push button 31B may be displayed at an angle different from the basic angle of a bird's-eye view of the push button 31B with the player's viewpoint facing directly to the gaming machine (gaming board).

For example, ally CA1 and second ally CA3 may be displayed in the display patterns (A) to (D) shown below. The second button performance may be executed by combining any of the display patterns (A) to (D).

(A) Ally CA1 and second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation advance notice display in the first mode are displayed at the same angle as the first angle obtained when the player's viewpoint is viewed from above the push button 31B from the upper right.

(B) The ally CA1 and the second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation notice display in the second mode are displayed at an angle different from the first angle, and at an angle common to the second angle obtained by looking down on the push button 31B from the upper right corner of the player's viewpoint.

(C) The ally CA1 and second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation notice display of the third aspect are at an angle different from the first angle and the second angle, and are displayed at an angle common to the third angle obtained by looking down on the push button 31B from a position rotated approximately 90 degrees to the lower left around an axis perpendicular to the gaming machine (gaming board) with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (gaming board).

(D) Ally CA1 and second ally CA3 displayed together with the second operation prompt display are displayed at an angle that is the same as the fourth angle obtained by looking down on push button 31B with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (gaming board).

(26) In the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the second operation preview display moves from the top of the screen of the image display device 5 to the bottom of the screen in the second button performance, but the present invention is not limited to this form, and the second operation preview display may move in a direction different from the direction from the top of the screen of the image display device 5 to the bottom of the screen in the second button performance.

For example, in the second button presentation, a presentation may be executed in which the second operation preview display moves from the left side of the screen of the image display device 5 to the right side of the screen, or a presentation may be executed in which the second operation preview display moves from the back of the screen of the image display device 5 to the front of the screen.

In addition, in the second button presentation, a presentation may be executed in which the second operation notice display moves from inside the screen of the image display device 5 to outside the screen. For example, a presentation may be executed in which the second operation notice display is displayed within the screen of the image display device 5 and then moves toward the push button 31B provided outside the screen of the image display device 5.

The characteristic part 03TM described above includes the following components:

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means includes:
A suggestion effect (battle effect) suggesting whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled can be executed by the display means,
In the above suggestive performance,
It is possible to place a first character (ally CA1) and a second character (enemy CA2) in positions facing each other,
It is possible to suggest that the first character is controlled to the advantageous state by winning a battle (a victory effect),
It is possible to suggest that the second character will not be controlled to the advantageous state by winning the battle (defeat effect),
A first display (the sixth battle image based on the first inner viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (11) and the like) which is an image of the first character seen from the front side, a third display (the eighth battle image based on the third inner viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (13) and the like) which is an image of the second character seen from the front side, a second display (the seventh battle image based on the second inner viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (12) and the like) which can be displayed after the first display and before the third display is displayed, and which is an image in which neither the first character nor the second character is displayed, and a fourth display (the ninth battle image based on the fourth inner viewpoint shown in FIG. 9-11 (14) and the like) which can be displayed after the third display and before the first display is displayed, and which is an image in which neither the first character nor the second character is displayed,
After displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved (after switching from the first inner viewpoint to the fourth inner viewpoint, it is possible to notify the result of the battle).
It is characterized by:

According to such a configuration, by displaying the first display, it becomes possible to visually confirm the detailed appearance of the first character, and by displaying the second display, it becomes possible to visually confirm the detailed appearance of the second character.
Furthermore, by displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display, the player can be given a sense of realism as if he or she were between the first character and the second character, and a powerful presentation image can be provided to the player, thereby increasing the interest when it is indicated whether or not control will be exercised in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the second aspect of the present invention is
A gaming machine according to the first embodiment,
The presentation control means is capable of simultaneously displaying the first character and the second character during a first period of the suggestive presentation (Figure 9-9: first half of SP reach, Figure 9-10: first part of the second half of SP reach), and is capable of announcing which of the first character and the second character has won the battle during a second period after the first period (Figure 9-14: third part of the second half of SP reach).

With this configuration, the first character and the second character are displayed simultaneously during the first period, suggesting a battle between the characters and also suggesting the relationship between the outcome of the battle and an advantageous state.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to the first or second means,
The performance control means includes:
The suggestive performance can be executed at a performance progression speed slower than a predetermined performance progression speed when the first display is displayed and when the third display is displayed (the switching from the sixth battle image to the seventh battle image and the switching from the eighth battle image to the ninth battle image are relatively slow);
When the second display is displayed and when the fourth display is displayed, the suggestive performance can be executed at a performance progression speed faster than the predetermined performance progression speed (the switch from the seventh battle image to the eighth battle image and the switch from the ninth battle image to the sixth battle image are relatively fast).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, when the character is displayed, the presentation progresses at a relatively slow speed, making it easier for the player to clearly observe the character's behavior, and when the character is not displayed, the presentation progresses at a relatively fast speed, making the character's appearance more memorable when the screen switches to one that displays the character.

The gaming machine according to the fourth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The performance control means includes:
A special display control (a series of display switching controls from the first inner viewpoint to the fourth inner viewpoint) for switching and displaying the first display, the second display, the third display, and the fourth display can be executed a plurality of times;
It is possible to make the display switching period of the special display control executed later shorter than the display switching period of the special display control executed earlier (the display switching period can be gradually shortened to 10 seconds, 9 seconds, 5 seconds, 2 seconds, and 1 second).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, even if the special display control is repeated multiple times, the display switching period of the special display control that is executed later becomes shorter, creating a sense of speed in the screen changes and preventing the special display control from feeling monotonous.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to a fourth aspect of the present invention,
An operation means (push button 31B) is provided,
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to cause the display means to display an operation prompting display (operation prompting display BT1) that prompts the user to operate the operating means,
It is possible to execute the second special display control after the first special display control, and execute the third special display control after the second special display control (a series of display switching controls from the inner first viewpoint to the inner fourth viewpoint can be repeatedly executed multiple times),
In a period corresponding to the second special display control and a period corresponding to the third special display control, a formation effect in which the operation prompting display is formed can be executed (a normal button effect in which the operation prompting display BT1 is formed stepwise can be executed from the third display switching control period (5 second cycle) to the fifth display switching control period (1 second cycle)).
It is characterized by:

With this configuration, the operation prompt display is formed in stages in response to the shortening of the display switching cycle of the special display control, so that the player's interest in the operation prompt display can be heightened as the sense of speed of the screen changes is improved, and interest can be efficiently increased by the formation presentation that is executed in parallel with the special display control that is executed multiple times.

The gaming machine according to the sixth aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention,
The performance control means includes:
When the third special display control is executed (when the fifth display switching control (cycle of 1 second) is completed), it is possible to display the first character in the first area of the display means (displaying ally CA1 in the upper left area of the screen), display the second character in the second area (displaying enemy CA2 in the lower right area of the screen), and display the operation promotion display in the third area (displaying operation promotion display BT1 in the central area of the screen).

This configuration makes effective use of the display area of the display means, making battles between characters even more exciting.

The gaming machine according to the seventh aspect of the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the present invention,
The effect control means is characterized in that it is capable of executing a special effect (whiteout effect) when the suggestive effect transitions from the first period (first part of the second half of the SP reach) to the second period (second part of the second half of the SP reach).

With this configuration, the special effects will first divert the player's attention from the character to the special effects, and then the second period of the suggestive effects will begin, so interest in the suggestive effects can be increased multiple times and the second period can be made more exciting.

The gaming machine of the eighth means comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5);
A movable body (movable body YM),
the movable body is movable from a first position (retracted position) to a second position (advanced position) which is a position covering the display means more than the first position,
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined image (an image of a SP reach) can be displayed on the display means as an image of a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state will be reached;
When a specific scene of the predetermined video is displayed, it is possible to move the movable body from the first position to the second position (when a performance video of the third chance up performance of the second half part of the SP reach is displayed, the movable body YM is moved from the retreat position to the advance position),
After it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestive performance, when the advantageous state is controlled, a specific image including at least the specific scene can be displayed (a replay image including an image of the third chance up performance in the second part of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed during the jackpot round period),
When the specific scene is displayed in the specific video, the movable body is restricted from being moved from the first position to the second position (when a replay video including a performance video of the third chance up performance in the second half part of the SP reach is displayed, the movable body YM is not moved from the retreat position to the advance position).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, after the suggestion effect notifies the player that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, a specific image including at least the specific scene is displayed on the display means, thereby satisfying the player's need to see the specific scene again when the game is controlled to an advantageous state, and by restricting the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position when the specific scene is displayed in the specific image, it is possible to prevent a decrease in visibility of the display means and increase the interest of the game when the game is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the 9th means comprises:
The gaming machine according to the eighth embodiment,
Sound output means (speakers 8L, 8R) are provided,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the presentation control means is capable of displaying, as images of the advantageous state, music images (music video presentation images (A), (B), and (C)) related to a music presentation in which music is played and output from the sound output means, the specific image, and a preview image related to a preview presentation that notifies the player that the specific image will be displayed (replay preview display of a replay preview presentation).

With this configuration, the specific scene when the player is in an advantageous state can be displayed even when the player is in an advantageous state different from the suggestive presentation, thereby satisfying the player's need to see the specific scene when the player is in an advantageous state again, and increasing the variety of presentations when the player is in an advantageous state, thereby increasing the interest of the game when the player is in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 10 includes:
The gaming machine according to the eighth or ninth means,
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (3R jackpot) and a second advantageous state (10R jackpot) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state,
The performance control means includes:
When the first advantageous state is reached, the specific image is restricted from being displayed as an image of the advantageous state (when a 3R jackpot is reached, the execution of a replay effect is restricted),
When the second advantageous state is reached, the specific image can be displayed as an image of the advantageous state (when a 10R jackpot is reached, a replay effect is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when the game is controlled to the second advantageous state, a specific image can be displayed as the image of the advantageous state, making the second advantageous state feel more special than the first advantageous state and drawing the player's attention to the types of advantageous states, thereby increasing the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 11 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 10,
The performance control means is capable of executing a special performance (chance up performance) when the suggestion performance is being executed,
The rate at which the special effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed than when the special effect is not executed;
The performance control means includes:
As the predetermined image, a special effect image related to the special effect can be displayed on the display means (as the effect image of the SP reach, an effect image related to the chance up effect can be displayed),
In the specific image, the display of the special effect image is restricted (in the replay image, the display of the effect image related to the chance-up effect is restricted).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by restricting the display of special effect images in specific images, it is possible to omit the process of determining whether or not to display special effect images for specific images, thereby reducing the processing burden on the effect control.

The gaming machine of means 12 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 11,
The performance control means is capable of displaying the specific image from the beginning when the display of the specific image ends before the advantageous state ends (when the replay image ends during a jackpot game state, the replay image is displayed again from the beginning).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when the display of the specific video ends before the advantageous state ends, it is possible to display the specific video from the beginning. This allows the presentation of the specific video to proceed smoothly if an irregular situation occurs while the player is being controlled to an advantageous state, and prevents the player from becoming confused.

The gaming machine of means 13 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 12,
The predetermined image includes a first predetermined image (a performance image of the first part of the latter half of the SP reach) and a second predetermined image (the second and third parts of the latter half of the SP reach) displayed after the first predetermined image,
The specific video includes a first specific video (a replay video of Capter 2) corresponding to the first predetermined video, and a second specific video (a replay video of Capter 3) corresponding to the second predetermined video,
When the advantageous state is controlled, the player can select at least one of the first specific video or the second specific video as the specific video (during a replay video selection period, a replay video selection icon is displayed on the left side of the screen of the image display device 5, a replay video selection prompt display BT1 is displayed on the right side of the screen of the image display device 5, and the player operates the push button 31B to determine the chapter corresponding to the replay video icon as the replay video).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when controlled to an advantageous state, the player can select at least one of the first specific image or the second specific image as the specific image, which prevents the period for displaying the specific image in the advantageous state from running out. Also, by allowing the player to select any specific image, the specific image can be displayed more effectively, which increases the interest of playing in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 14 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 13,
The performance control means includes:
A specific scene from the predetermined video can be displayed (the second half of the SP reach is displayed),
When the advantageous state is controlled, a specific image including at least the specific scene of the predetermined image can be displayed as the image of the advantageous state (a replay image including the performance image of the second part of the latter half of the SP reach is displayed during the jackpot round).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by displaying a specific image including at least the specific scene on the display means, it is possible to satisfy the needs of the player who wants to see the specific scene again when the player is in an advantageous state, and it is also possible to display the specific image more effectively, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game when the player is in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 15 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 8 to 14,
A variable display means for performing variable display of special identification information,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result (the display result of the second special pattern becomes a “big win” or a “small win”), the advantageous state can be controlled,
The performance control means, when controlled in the advantageous state, is capable of executing a predetermined performance suggesting that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result (the means is capable of executing consecutive image hold performances during the jackpot round period).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when controlled to an advantageous state, the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not met is suggested to be a specific display result, providing a sense of surprise to the player, allowing the specific image to be displayed more effectively, and increasing the interest of the game in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 16 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A variable display means (CPU 103, performance control CPU 120) for executing a variable display (variable display of special symbols, variable display of decorative symbols);
A variable means (special variable winning ball device 7) that can be controlled between a first state (open state) in which the game medium can enter and a second state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game medium to enter than the first state;
a round game control means (CPU 103) for executing a round game (jackpot round game) in which, when controlled to the advantageous state, the variable means is controlled from the second state to the first state and then controlled to the second state;
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
A display means (image display device 5);
Light emitting means (attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9);
The performance control means includes:
In the round game, the light emitting means can be made to emit light based on the game medium entering the variable means (in the big win round game, an attacker lamp light emitting effect is executed based on the detection of the game ball entering the big win opening),
In the round game, the number of times the game medium has entered the variable means can be indicated by the light emission mode of the light emission means (in the jackpot round game, the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light emission presentation is made different according to the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter),
In the round game, the display means is used to restrict the indication of the entry number, and the display means is used to execute a special effect corresponding to the advantageous state (in a big win round game, the execution of an effect that notifies the detection of the entry of a game ball into a big win hole on the screen of the image display device 5 is restricted, and a music video effect or a round number display effect is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by restricting the use of the display means to suggest the entry number and using the light-emitting means to suggest the entry number, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the visibility of the special effects being performed on the display means, thereby increasing the interest of the game when in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 17 comprises:
The gaming machine of means 16,
The presentation control means changes the light emission mode of the light emitting means according to the number of entries (when detecting the entry of the first to third game balls into the large prize opening, the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L3 emit orange light, when detecting the entry of the fourth to sixth game balls into the large prize opening, the attacker lamps 77L4 to 77L6 emit pink light, when detecting the entry of the seventh to ninth game balls into the large prize opening, the attacker lamps 77L7 to 77L9 emit red light, and when detecting the entry of the tenth game ball into the large prize opening, the attacker lamps 77L1 to 77L9 emit rainbow light).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when controlled to be in an advantageous state, the light emission state of the light emitting means can be changed according to the number of entries, thereby drawing attention to the light emitting means and increasing the interest of the game in the advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 18 comprises:
The gaming machine according to the sixth or seventeenth aspect of the present invention,
A variable display means for performing variable display of special identification information,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the display can be controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing a predetermined performance (light-emitting hold continuous performance) that suggests that a display result of a variable display for which a start condition is not satisfied is the specific display result when the performance control means is controlled to the advantageous state,
The performance control means is capable of executing the predetermined performance by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a specific manner (the fifth attacker lamp 77L5 can be made to emit light in rainbow colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the light emitting means can indicate that the display result of the variable display for which the start condition is not met is a specific display result, in addition to the number of game media inserted, providing a sense of surprise to the player and increasing the interest of the game when in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 19 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 18,
The round game control means is capable of setting the number of the game media that can be entered when the variable means is controlled to the first state in the round game to a predetermined number (10);
The performance control means includes:
When the variable means is controlled to the first state in the round game, an excess entry effect (over winning effect) can be executed to notify when a number of the game media greater than the predetermined number has entered;
The over-entry effect can be executed by making the light-emitting means emit light in the first special mode (the over-entry effect can be executed by making the first attacker lamp 77L1 to the ninth attacker lamp 77L9 emit strong light in rainbow colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the light emitting means can not only notify the player of the number of game media that have entered, but also make the player aware that a number of game media greater than a predetermined number has entered, thereby increasing the player's interest in playing in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 20 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 19,
When the display result of the variable display becomes a special display result (the display result of the second special pattern becomes a “small win”), the game can be controlled to a special state (small win game state) different from the advantageous state,
When the game medium is controlled to the special state, the game medium can be controlled to the advantageous state (jackpot game state) based on passing through a specific area (V winning area 870),
When the effect control means is controlled to the special state, the effect control means is capable of executing a specific effect (attacker lamp V winning notification effect) that notifies the player when the game medium passes through the specific area,
The specific performance can be executed by making the light emitting means emit light in the second special mode (the attacker lamp V winning notification performance is executed by making the first attacker lamp 77L1 emit strong orange light).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the light emitting means can, in addition to notifying the player of the number of game media entering, make the player aware that the game media have passed through a specific area, and prevent situations in which the game media has not passed through a specific area, preventing the player from being at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of means 21 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 20,
The performance control means includes:
The power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, and after the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, a recovery display (a recovery display including the characters “power recovery in progress”) can be displayed on the display means;
When the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped while the gaming machine is controlled to the advantageous state, and when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the display means displays the restoration display, thereby making it difficult to view the image corresponding to the advantageous state (when a power interruption occurs during a jackpot gaming state and the power is restored, a restoration display having a higher display priority than a presentation image related to a jackpot round presentation is displayed);
When the display means is displaying the recovery display, the number of entries can be indicated by the light emission mode of the light emission means (when the recovery display is being displayed, the attacker lamp is illuminated by changing the presentation mode of the attacker lamp light emission presentation according to the count value of the jackpot round winning number counter).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when the display means is displaying the recovery display, the light emitting means indicates the number of entries, so that when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, it is possible to accurately indicate to the player that the machine is being controlled to an advantageous state, and it is possible to prevent the player from being put at a disadvantage.

The gaming machine of means 22 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 16 to 21,
The performance control means is capable of executing a special performance (a first chance up performance to a fourth chance up performance) when the suggestion performance is being executed,
The rate at which the special effect is controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special effect is executed than when the special effect is not executed;
The special effects include a first special effect (a third chance up effect in a chance mode) and a second special effect (a third chance up effect in a hot mode) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first special effect.
The performance control means includes:
The number of times the special effects are executed can be indicated by the light emitting state of the light emitting means (one attacker lamp is illuminated each time the chance up effect is executed),
When the special effect is executed, it is possible to indicate whether the first special effect or the second special effect has been executed by the light emission mode of the light emitting means (when the third chance up effect in the chance mode is executed, a chance up related light emission mode (low expectation mode) in which the attacker lamp is illuminated in white is executed, and when the third chance up effect in the hottest mode is executed, a chance up related light emission mode (high expectation mode) in which the attacker lamp is illuminated in red is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the light emitting means indicates the number of times the special effects have been performed and the type of special effect that has been performed, allowing the player to easily check whether or not there is a high probability that the suggested effects will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing the player's interest in the suggested effects.

The gaming machine of means 23 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by a player;
A display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means includes:
A suggestion effect (SP reach) indicating whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved can be executed by the display means,
When the suggestion effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) can be executed to display an image related to the operation means;
The operation-related effects include a first operation-related effect (a first button effect) and a second operation-related effect (a second button effect) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related effect,
The performance control means includes:
In the first operation-related presentation, a first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed as an image related to the operation means, the first display being an image that displays the operation means at a first angle (a basic angle in which the push button 31B is overlooked with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (game board)) that is an angle at which the operation means is viewed from the front side and at which the entire operation means can be viewed;
In the second operation-related performance, as images related to the operation means, a second display (second operation advance display of the first aspect) which is an image displaying the operation means at a second angle (first angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right) different from the first angle, a third display (second operation promotion display of the second aspect) which is an image displaying the operation means at a third angle (a second angle when the push button 31B is viewed from the upper right) which is an angle different from the first angle, and a fourth display (second operation promotion display) which is an image displaying the operation means at the first angle and which is an image different from the first display, can be displayed;
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the first operation prompt display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation is executed to notify the display result),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the fourth display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the second operation prompt display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation informing the display result is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in the first operation-related performance, which is less likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the second operation-related performance, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means at one angle, while in the second operation-related performance, which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the first operation-related performance, the image related to the operation means is an image that displays the operation means from multiple angles, making the second operation-related performance feel more special than the first operation-related performance and increasing interest in the suggestion performance in which the operation-related performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 24 includes:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by a player;
A display means (image display device 5),
The performance control means includes:
A suggestion effect (SP reach) indicating whether or not the advantageous state will be achieved can be executed by the display means,
When the suggestion effect is being executed, a specific display (a notice caption of the third chance up effect) can be displayed,
The specific display includes a first specific display (a white advance notice caption) displayed in a predetermined color, and a second specific display (a gold advance notice caption) that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific display and is displayed in a specific color,
When the suggestion effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) can be executed to display an image related to the operation means;
The operation-related effects include a first operation-related effect (a first button effect) and a second operation-related effect (a second button effect) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related effect,
The performance control means includes:
In the first operation-related presentation, a first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed as an image related to the operation means, the first display being an image that displays the operation means at a first angle (a basic angle in which the push button 31B is overlooked with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (game board)) that is an angle at which the operation means is viewed from the front side and at which the entire operation means can be viewed;
In the second operation-related performance, as images related to the operation means, a second display (second operation notice display of the first aspect) which is an image displaying the operation means at a second angle (first angle viewed from above the push button 31B from the upper right) different from the first angle, and a third display (second operation promotion display) which is an image displaying the operation means at the first angle and different from the first display, can be displayed;
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the first operation prompt display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation is executed to notify the display result),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the second operation prompting display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation is executed to notify the display result),
The background image (special background image BI) when the second operation-related performance is executed is composed of a plurality of colors (gold, black) including at least a similar color to the specific color, and the proportion of the similar colors to the specific color among the plurality of colors is the highest (in the special background image, gold: about 80%, black: about 20%).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when the second operation-related effect is executed, the background image has the highest proportion of similar colors to the specific color among multiple colors that include at least a similar color to the specific color that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. This makes the second operation-related effect feel more special than the first operation-related effect, and allows the player to easily recognize that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state more often, allowing the player to anticipate advantageous developments following the operation-related effect.

The gaming machine of means 25 comprises:
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means (performance control CPU 120) for executing a performance;
An operation means (push button 31B) that can be operated by a player;
A display means (image display device 5),
The operation means is composed of an operation section (operation valid section) that can be operated by a player and a non-operation section (operation non-valid section) that cannot be operated by a player,
The performance control means includes:
A suggestion effect (SP reach) that suggests whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled using a specific character (ally character CA1) can be executed on the display means,
When the suggestion effect is being executed, an operation-related effect (a first button effect, a second button effect) can be executed to display an image related to the operation means;
The operation-related effects include a first operation-related effect (a first button effect) and a second operation-related effect (a second button effect) that is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first operation-related effect,
The performance control means includes:
In the first operation-related presentation, a first display (first operation promotion display) can be displayed as an image related to the operation means, the first display being an image that displays the operation means at a first angle (a basic angle in which the push button 31B is overlooked with the player's viewpoint facing directly toward the gaming machine (game board)) that is an angle at which the operation means is viewed from the front side and at which the entire operation means can be viewed;
In the second operation-related performance, as images related to the operation means, a second display (second operation advance display of the second aspect) which is an image displaying the operation means at a second angle (a second angle obtained by looking down on the push button 31B from the upper right) different from the first angle, and a third display (second operation promotion display) which is an image displaying the operation means at the first angle and different from the first display, can be displayed;
In the first display, the specific character is not displayed (the ally character CA1 is not displayed in the first operation prompting display),
In the second display, the specific character is displayed in an image related to the operation unit among images related to the operation means (the ally character CA1 is displayed in the operation effective portion of the second operation notice display of the second aspect),
In the first operation-related presentation, when the first display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the first operation prompt display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation is executed to notify the display result),
In the second operation-related presentation, when the third display is displayed, it is possible to suggest whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when the second operation prompt display is displayed, based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation is executed to notify the display result).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by displaying a specific character in the image related to the operation unit among the images related to the operation means when the second operation-related performance is executed, it is possible to give the second operation-related performance a more special feeling than the first operation-related performance, and to increase the interest of the suggestion performance in which the operation-related performance is executed.

The gaming machine of means 26 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 23,
The presentation control means, in the second operation-related presentation, is capable of successively displaying the second display (second operation notice display of the first mode), the third display (second operation notice display of the second mode) which is more visible than the second display, and the fourth display (second operation promotion display) which is more visible than the third display, and then suggesting whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operating means (based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a presentation informing the player of the display result is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by gradually improving the visibility of the image related to the operation means, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image related to the operation means and to pique his or her interest in the next image to be displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the suggestion effect in which the second operation-related effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 27 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 26,
The presentation control means is capable of displaying on the display means a special display (blackout image BO) that reduces the visibility of the image that was previously displayed before an image related to the operation means is displayed.

With this configuration, before an image related to the operating means is displayed, a special display that reduces the visibility of the image that was previously displayed is displayed, so that the image related to the operating means can be further emphasized, and the interest of the suggestive presentation in which an image related to the operating means is displayed can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 28 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 27,
Sound output means (speakers 8L and 8R) are provided.
The performance control means, in the second operation-related performance,
The sound output means is capable of outputting a specific sound (sound effect),
When an image related to the operation means is displayed, it is possible to emphasize the pitch (key) of the specific sound when the angle at which the operation means is viewed is changed (the key of the sound effect increases in the order of the second operation advance display of the first aspect, the second operation advance display of the second aspect, and the second operation promotion display).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, by gradually increasing the pitch of the specific sound, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the image related to the operating means and to pique his or her interest in the next image to be displayed, thereby increasing the interest of the suggestive presentation in which the second operation-related presentation is executed.

The gaming machine of means 29 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 23,
The performance control means includes:
A suggestion effect is executed on the display means, the suggestion effect indicating whether or not the advantageous state will be controlled using a specific character (ally character CA1);
In the first operation-related performance, when the first display is displayed, display of characters including at least the specific character is restricted (when the first operation promotion display is displayed, a first operation promotion effect display is displayed without displaying the ally character CA1),
In the second operation-related performance, when the fourth display is displayed, characters including at least the specific character can be displayed (when the second operation prompting display is displayed, an ally character CA1 and a second ally character CA3 are displayed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in the first operation-related performance, when the first display is displayed, the display of characters including at least the specific character is restricted, and in the second operation-related performance, when the fourth display is displayed, characters including at least the specific character are displayed, making the second operation-related performance feel more special than the first operation-related performance and increasing the interest of the suggestion performance in which the operation-related performance is executed.

The gaming machine of the means 30 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 29,
Equipped with special light emitting means (light guide plate),
The performance control means includes:
It is possible to execute a light-emitting effect in which the special light-emitting means emits light in a specific light-emitting mode (a light-guiding plate light-emitting effect in which the light-guiding plate emits light in rainbow colors);
When it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operating means, a pseudo light-emitting effect that does not use the special light-emitting means and corresponds to the light-emitting effect can be executed (when it is notified that the display result is a "jackpot" based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, a pseudo light-emitting effect that imitates a light-guiding plate light-emitting effect that causes a light-guiding plate to emit rainbow colors can be executed on the screen of the image display device 5).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, pseudo-lighting effects that correspond to light-emitting effects that use special light-emitting means, which were difficult to implement in terms of cost and space, can be executed without using special light-emitting means, and the excitement when controlled to an advantageous state can be increased to the same extent as with gaming machines equipped with special light-emitting means.

The gaming machine of means 31 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 30,
The performance control means starts the operation-related performance when the suggestion performance is being executed, and ends the operation-related performance (starts/ends the button performance (first button performance, second button performance) during the SP reach).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player by interrupting the suggestive performance, and by resuming the suggestive performance after the operation-related performance has ended, it is possible to make the player aware of the performance that had been performed up to that point, preventing the player from suddenly entering an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the means 32 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 31,
The suggestive effects include a first suggestive effect (normal reach) and a second suggestive effect (SP reach) which is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than the first suggestive effect,
The performance control means limits the execution of the operation-related performance when the first suggestion performance is executed (in step S03TM3010 of the performance determination process at the time of fluctuation start, if the fluctuation pattern is not a fluctuation pattern accompanied by a super reach (i.e., if the fluctuation pattern is a "normal reach"), the process of determining the performance type of the button performance in step S03TM3060 is skipped, so that the button performance is not executed).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, in the first suggestion effect, which is less likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the second suggestion effect, the execution of the operation-related effect is restricted, which prevents the first suggestion effect, which has a short execution period, from becoming drawn out and makes the second suggestion effect stand out even more.

The gaming machine of means 33 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 32,
The performance control means, in the operation-related performance,
The image associated with the operating means can be moved from a first position (top of the screen) to a second position (bottom of the screen);
When an image related to the operation means is moved from the first position to the second position, the angle at which the operation means is viewed is switched and the image related to the operation means is displayed (the images are displayed while moving from the top to the bottom of the screen in the order of the second operation notice display of the first aspect, the second operation notice display of the second aspect, the second operation notice display of the third aspect, and the second operation promotion display, and the angles are switched).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the image related to the operating means moves, giving the operation-related effect a special feel, allowing the player to recognize that this is an operation-related effect that is different from an operation-related effect in which the image related to the operating means does not move, and creating a sense of anticipation for the display result of the variable display that is notified after the operation-related effect.

The gaming machine of means 34 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 33,
The image related to the operation means is a three-dimensional image imitating the operation means (the second operation advance notice display and the second operation promotion display are three-dimensional images imitating the push button 31B),
The performance control means includes:
An image (a second operation advance notice display, a second operation promotion display) related to the operation means,
The image can be displayed in a stationary state in which no motion is performed and in an operational state in which motion is performed differently from the stationary state (the image can be displayed in a state in which no motion is performed and a state in which motion is performed),
It can be displayed in a predetermined manner in which it is displayed in a predetermined color and in a non-predetermined manner in which it is not displayed in the predetermined color (it can be displayed in a manner in which it emits gold light and a manner in which it does not emit gold light),
When the operation of the operation means is not enabled, an image related to the operation means can be displayed in a still mode and a non-predetermined mode (the second operation notice display when the operation of the push button 31B is not enabled is displayed in a mode in which no operation is being performed and in a mode in which no gold light is emitted),
When the operation of the operating means is enabled, an image related to the operating means can be displayed in an operating state and a predetermined state (the second operation prompting display when the operation of the push button 31B is enabled is displayed in a state in which an operation is being performed and in a state in which the image is emitting gold light).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the image related to the operating means is a three-dimensional image that imitates the operating means, which improves the presentation effect when the image related to the operating means is displayed from a number of different angles, and when the operation of the operating means is valid, the image related to the operating means is displayed in an action mode and a specified mode, making it possible to clearly indicate to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid.

The gaming machine of means 35 comprises:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 34,
The effect control means is capable of making the operation means emit light and operating the operation means when notifying that the advantageous state will be controlled based on the operation of the operation means (when a winning effect is executed based on the operation of the push button 31B by the player, the push button 31B vibrates and emits light in rainbow colors).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the operation means emits light, clearly indicating to the player that the operation of the operation means is valid, and the player's interest is heightened when the operation of the operation means results in control of an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 36 includes:
A gaming machine according to any one of means 23 to 35,
The execution period of the second operation-related effect is longer than the execution period of the first operation-related effect (as shown in FIG. 9-39, the execution period of the first button effect is the period from T18 to T31, and as shown in FIG. 9-41, the execution period of the second button effect is the period from T14 to T31).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, the second operation-related effect can be executed for a longer period of time than the first operation-related effect, which increases the excitement when the game is controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of means 37 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 23,
the first angle is an angle at which a player can see the operation means,
At least one of the second angle or the third angle is an angle at which it is difficult for a player to see the operating means (an angle looking down on the push button 31B from the back side).

With this configuration, by displaying images related to the operation means from multiple different angles, including angles at which it is difficult for the player to see the operation means, the second operation-related effect can be made to feel more special than the first operation-related effect, and interest in the suggestion effect in which the operation-related effect is executed can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 38 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 23,
In the first operation-related performance, before the first display is displayed, the operation of the operation means is not enabled (the first operation notice display indicates that the operation is not enabled),
In the second operation-related performance, the operation of the operating means is not enabled before the fourth display is displayed (the second operation advance display indicates that the operation is not enabled).
A gaming machine characterized by:

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the operation of the operating means from becoming effective before the first display is displayed in the first operation-related presentation, thereby reducing the presentation effect of the first operation-related presentation, and to prevent the operation of the operating means from becoming effective before the fourth display is displayed in the second operation-related presentation, thereby reducing the presentation effect of the second operation-related presentation.

The gaming machine of means 39 includes:
A gaming machine according to the means 23,
The performance control means is capable of displaying a specific display (announcement caption) when the suggestive performance is being executed,
The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the specific display is displayed than when the specific display is not displayed;
The specific display includes a first specific display (a white advance notice caption) displayed in a predetermined color, and a second display (a gold advance notice caption) that has a higher probability of being controlled to the advantageous state than the first specific display and is displayed in a specific color,
The background image (special background image BI) when the second operation-related performance is executed is composed of a plurality of colors (gold, black) including at least a similar color to the specific color, and the proportion of the similar colors to the specific color among the plurality of colors is the highest (in the special background image, gold: about 80%, black: about 20%).
A gaming machine characterized by:

With this configuration, when the second operation-related effect is executed, the background image has the highest proportion of similar colors to the specific color among multiple colors that include at least a similar color to the specific color that suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state. This makes the second operation-related effect feel more special than the first operation-related effect, and allows the player to easily recognize that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state more often, allowing the player to anticipate advantageous developments following the operation-related effect.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A performance control means for executing a performance;
A display means;
A sound output means;
A movable body,
the movable body is movable from a first position to a second position that is a position covering the display means more than the first position,
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined image can be displayed on the display means as an image of a suggestive effect suggesting whether or not the game will be controlled to the advantageous state,
When a specific scene of the predetermined image is displayed , the movable body is capable of being moved from the first position to the second position,
A specific image can be displayed after the suggestion performance is notified that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state and the game starts to be controlled to the advantageous state,
the specific video includes a first specific video including at least the specific scene, a second specific video suggesting that the first specific video will be displayed, and a third specific video corresponding to a piece of music output from the sound output means;
The performance control means includes:
When the specific scene is displayed in the first specific image, the movable body is not moved from the first position to the second position;
When the suggestion performance is being performed, a special performance can be performed;
As the predetermined image, a special effect image related to the special effect and a game information display related to the progress of the game can be displayed on the display means;
In the first specific image, the special effect image and the game information display are not displayed,
In the suggestion performance, the ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher when the special performance is executed than when the special performance is not executed.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images